JP6713559B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a prize game is paid out and a hit game is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

For example, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters the starting opening, a determination process for a hit that triggers the execution of a hit game is performed with a predetermined winning probability. At this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on the predetermined display device for a predetermined variation time. Then, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing that the winning is won, a winning game in which many prizes can be won by the player is performed. ..

In addition, during such a winning game period, a predetermined display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device so as to improve the enjoyment of the game during the winning game period.

JP, 2008-022870, A

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in the period in which the winning game is played, the special winning opening is often opened for a long time so that the player can obtain a large number of prizes. In this regard, when the special winning opening is in the open state, it is necessary for the player side to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the winning situation, so that a predetermined display effect is performed on the liquid crystal display device. However, even if the special winning opening is kept open for a long time, it is not possible to concentrate on the display effect, and it is not possible to appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Means 1: Launching means for sequentially launching game media to the game area,
A profit giving means for giving a profit,
An opening/closing member operable between a closed state and an open state is provided, and when the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game medium in a specific rolling area of the game area is entered into the internal area. And a means of winning
A specific area that can be given a special profit by passing the game ball that has entered the internal area,
An opening/closing control means for controlling the operation of the opening/closing member when the profit is given ,
The winning means is
When the game medium is continuously emitted by the projecting means when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game medium is in a state of waiting for entry into the internal area of the winning opening means within the specific rolling area. A medium decelerating unit that makes it possible to decelerate the flow-down speed, and, when the opening and closing member is opened, a maintenance medium entry allowance that allows the decelerated game medium to enter the internal area of the winning opening unit. Have means,
The opening and closing control means,
After maintaining the opening/closing member in a closed state for a special closing interval that is longer than the interval at which the game medium is launched by the launching means, the special closing is made even though the opening time is shorter than the special closing interval. A short opening long closing game realizing means capable of executing a control for causing a short opening operation in which the game medium in the entry waiting state is allowed to enter the internal area of the winning opening means during an interval. Cage,
The short open long closed game realizing means,
The short opening operation is performed at a time equal to or longer than the interval at which the game medium is launched by the launching means so that the game medium in the entry waiting state is allowed to enter the internal area of the winning opening means during the benefit granting by the benefit granting means. By executing a plurality of times across the special closing interval, the total time during which the opening/closing member is opened in the plurality of short opening operations is larger than that in the case where the opening/closing member is always opened. Enter the medium into the internal area of the winning opening means,
The total time during which the opening/closing member is in the open state in the plurality of short opening operations is longer than the period during which the effect is executable when the opening/closing member is normally opened over the special closing interval. The production is performed while a long closing period in which the opening/closing member is closed and a short opening period in which the opening/closing member is opened for a short opening time shorter than the special closing interval appear repeatedly. A gaming machine characterized by.

According to the above configuration, the expected value for winning is improved to one or more (the expected value of the number of game media in the entry waiting state during the special closing interval) even though the opening operation is short. Therefore, in providing a game in which a lot of game media are won to the winning opening means, the time when the winning opening means is closed (special closing interval) is opened (short opening operation). Time) will be able to be longer than that.

In this respect, in the above configuration, there are a closed long period in which the opening/closing member is closed over the special closing interval and a short opening period in which the opening/closing member is opened for an opening time shorter than the special closing interval. Since the production is performed while appearing repeatedly, while the opening/closing member is kept closed for a relatively long time, a game in which a lot of game media is won to the winning opening means is provided. This makes it easier to concentrate on the production (closed for a long period), and suppresses a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main body frame was opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame was opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at a door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut|disconnected by the site|part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the upper right front side. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, (D). FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes|disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing the relation between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the circulation path of the sphere in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening/closing unit in the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening/closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board|substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall part of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of a back cover in the body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site|part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, which is disassembled and seen from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation|movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which saw the winning a prize unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning a prize unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the winning a prize unit for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the winning a prize unit for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of a winning a prize unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting mouth unit of a winning a prize mouth unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting port unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the variable starting port unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the variable starting opening unit and was seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit retracted from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit advanced from the upper side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit of a winning opening unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit from the back. (A) is a front view of an accessory unit, (b) is an AA sectional view in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the accessory winning opening unit of the accessory unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the accessory prize opening unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the V winning opening unit of the accessory unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the V winning opening unit and was seen from the back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body of the V winning opening unit faces the receiving side, and (b) shows a state in which the receiving portion of the rotating body faces the V winning opening side. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front side. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball on the right side of the game board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit, and (b) is the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member advanced. It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from the front side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit from the left front, (b) is the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member advanced. It is an explanatory view showing the flow from the left front, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball from the left front when the starting opening door member is retracting. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game sphere at the time of being able to receive the prize winning hole in a prize unit, and (b) is a V winning hole unit WHEREIN: The receiving part of a rotary body is a V winning hole It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when facing the side from the front side. It is the figure which looked at the accessory prize opening opening and closing member from the above. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interception board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal sound signal interruption board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of control processing of a special design. It is a flow chart which shows a starting mouth winning process. It is the flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing of the special design. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing of a special design. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change of a special symbol. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hitting game start processing of the special design. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hitting game processing of the special design. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game start processing of the special design. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing of the special design. It is a figure showing a distribution table of various random numbers provided for a special symbol lottery. It is a time chart which shows the example about the relationship between the opening state of the winning part winning opening and the operating state of the rotating body (sorting device) when a small hit game (a disadvantageous small hit, an advantageous small hit) is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding one example of the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure about an example of processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing performed every 16ms in sub main processing. It is a time chart which shows the example of the flow of the game when advancing the game based on the playability of the pachinko machine 1, and the flow of the production which matched it.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable and the front side is opened. A box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, into which a game ball T as a game medium is driven, the main body frame 3 and the front surface of the game board 4 are played. It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. On the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball T arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It is provided with a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. ..

As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the pachinko machine 1 has a horizontal direction. Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

In this pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 into which a game ball T is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward below the game window 101. The two upper plates 301 and the lower plate 302 are vertically arranged. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player handles the handle device 500 while the game balls T are stored in the upper plate 301. When is operated to rotate, the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is made impossible to insert a hand or the like into the game ball T, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98), the various winning holes, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 are provided with four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, respectively. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially vertically centered at the left and right ends. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. It should be noted that a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surfaces thereof are substantially flat surfaces, and the inner side surfaces thereof project inward at the rear end portions. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 can be easily hooked with a finger so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state where the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10 and to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower metal supporting member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the metal reinforcing member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

First, the upper support member 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a forward of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projecting piece. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting projecting piece 20b (FIG. 14), and a stop hanging part 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b. The details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped support projection piece 21c projecting from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front side of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame board 11, and a pin shape protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projection piece 21c. Support projections 21d. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support metal member 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal member 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the supporting protruding piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

As shown in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state where it is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a. A state in which the side of the tip faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, which are located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the stopper 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. Since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d by exerting the acting force F in the direction of slipping out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. The state of being sandwiched between the inner surface of one side is maintained. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or the state in which the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece 27c is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) that separates from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of further disengagement, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside where the rotation moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock is performed. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivotal support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivotal support fitting 644 (see FIG. 63). It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and pushed in, thereby As shown in FIG. 16(B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the pivot pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the pivot pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16(C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening/closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16(E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded mold material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a light-weight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the insides of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large at the same time that the can be attached to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is tightly attached to the outer frame 2 and the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can be a rectangular frame. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, Adjacent ball lending machine) can be installed closely.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game frame 101 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 is a door unit 300 that is attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 that is attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a door that penetrates the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball T, and a door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface, the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 closed on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590 to be attached.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example has a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and whose inner circumference is formed into a vertically elongated substantially elliptical shape. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to a front lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110, are provided.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower part of the game window 101 with the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction in rear view (open side) ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. A handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100, a handle device relay substrate cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192, and a firing cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. And a door frame base substrate 194 that is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay substrate 192 and the like (to the right of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear (the pivot side)), and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base. A door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the substrate 194, and a wiring cord 196 that is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 and that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (Fig. Wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring holding member 197).

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is enhanced by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like.

The door frame base board 194 of the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also a peripheral control board provided on the game board 4 described later. The amplifier circuit is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 and amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, A wiring cord 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like, and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, and the like is located on the right side (axis) in the rear view of the door frame base board 194. After being bundled together in the position of (the support side), the details will be described later, but are held by the wiring holding member 197 and extend rearward, and the main side relay terminal plate 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a rectangular cutout 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivotal support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and the widths of the left and right side sides of the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580 are mounted and fixed. For the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26), the game ball T that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300 is the ball feeding unit 580. And a handle for mounting the handle bracket 140 that is obliquely inclined so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that is located in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward is retracted. The mounting portion 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. And a lock hole 116 into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base board 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side, and the glass unit 590. Glass unit support step 110a with which the outer peripheral edge of the front surface can abut, and two locking member attachments for projecting rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 and for rotatably supporting the glass unit locking member 190. And a section 110b.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c which projects rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130, and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 at appropriate positions, respectively. Has been formed.

Further, in the door frame base body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act against the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent the crime and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view from the center of the game area 1100 by a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1). 0.5 m) is obliquely fixed so that a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can most efficiently receive sound. Further, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in a mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high sense of stereo.

The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby a door frame is formed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, and the rear side rear surface has a vertical direction. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center of the. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape that extends long in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section, as shown in FIGS. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three upper and lower in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 is vertically aligned with the step 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be housed in the step portion 195a.

This wiring holding member 197 has a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof, and is bundled in a predetermined combination in the holding holes 197a paired up and down. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side becomes free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. The rear frame is rotatably supported, and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connecting connector, etc.) due to being pinched or pinched.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to make it difficult to shake in the vertical direction, and it is possible to surely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. When the wiring 196 hangs down, the wiring 196 is caught by another member and is disconnected. It is possible to prevent a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electric device and the door side. The wiring 196 connecting the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, the speakers 130, 222, 262, the ball rental unit 360, the handle device 500, etc. as electric devices is defective. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the noise as much as possible.

In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 can be rotated even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by using the wire, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and broken, or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, a conventional wiring (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-213675) is used. The wiring 196 does not slide as in the case of 4), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged away from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened/closed by being guided (guided), the main body frame 3 in which the strength/rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 which is pivotally supported is increased. The door frame 5 can be used as the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance against fraud can be provided.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 form the wiring. It is possible to surround three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wiring 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the shaft center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the shaft center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. A pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3. Therefore, wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 is performed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acts on the wiring 196, etc. to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back at the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted when the door frame 5 is closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, The wiring holding member 197 is provided with a stepped portion 195a. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a defect from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the effect described above. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be held to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the large game board 4 and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when mounted on the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500, which is supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state, is also inclined in a similar manner.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes, as mainly shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154 attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and these are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a rectangular shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface and a lower surface thereof on upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side, so that the door frame 5 is relative to the main body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same width as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the edge of the upper long side. , And a vertical bending protrusion 161 which is bent rearward at the center of the upper long side edge and extends vertically. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending projection 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101 a of the door frame base body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is formed so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as illustrated. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 108). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 includes bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long sides thereof.

Since the shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform actions, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the C-shape (FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, prevent only the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, and enhance the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent an illegal tool from entering the game board 4. As shown in the drawing, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Of the contact recess 181 which is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and which is formed in an arc shape at the upper side thereof. And a crime prevention rear protrusion 182 that protrudes rearward along the upper end. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting rearward along the end shape thereof are provided, respectively. Note that the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the right side (the pivot side) in the rear view is extended rearward longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, a crime prevention front projection 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front projection 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to be fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertical bending protrusion 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime-preventing rear projecting piece 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half thereof is a front configuration. The member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the crime prevention post piece 182 inserted below the inner rail.

The security cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail and the inner rail with the back surface of the security cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses the passage.

Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, and thus the fraudulent act. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly safe against such problems.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a locking screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b with the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 passing through the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a rearward projecting ridge that rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

The firing cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. As illustrated, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed while being formed in an arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. On the rear side of the side inner lens 212, a right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged from a substantially vertical center to an upper side, and on which a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted, and a side inner on the lower side. Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, which are arranged below substantially the center of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216. And a lower right side decorative substrate cover 220 attached to the lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged at the front outer side of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are the side inner lenses. An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, The players 216a and 216b cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 are white, and the right side decoration unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. The decoration boards 214, 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4010, respectively, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control substrate 4010. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the right outer circumference. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a which are divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and which extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the drawing, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusion lens portion 210c is capable of widely diffusing light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down directions of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion projecting forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by means of a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and in cooperation with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side, the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 is glitter. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a, 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60° to 180°) are used, and the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15° to 60°) is used. The LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 is, in this example, a red LED and a green LED.

Similarly to the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a sound in the mid-high range, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right part speaker 222 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, so that noise is generated against other pachinko machines. It's becoming harder. As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, the light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and at the same time, the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. As shown, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetric with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and an oval shape arranged between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and arranged in a row. And a frame-shaped upper side decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

The left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted from the rear side into the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a that are supported from Inner decoration member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a and a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 And a side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses extending radially centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below substantially from the center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and on which a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) are mounted. A left side upper decoration board cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration board 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration board 256. The left side lower decorative substrate cover 260 is attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative substrate 256.

Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 is a front left side speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right side in a front view, and a transparent speaker mounted on the upper right side of the front side of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left side speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver color in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 is made of a synthetic resin that is translucent and has a milky white color. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In the present example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101) are used. Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b with the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 penetrating in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted and closed from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, respectively. The inner decoration member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffused portion 252a diffuses and refracts the light to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

Further, the front surfaces of the left-side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left-side lower decoration substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decoration unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control substrate 4010, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control substrate 4010. The left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting.

The lower side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend in the up-down direction along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section whose rear side is open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small portion arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and on the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and which penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other.

Further, the upper side decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in a front view, which is continuous with the upper end of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side decoration frame 244 is arranged between the large window frames 244a and two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a small elliptical window frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

The side decoration frame 244 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the upper side decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246 corresponding to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side, and a shape recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens section 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the emission lens section 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is provided on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and also in the width direction so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. The inner decorative member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251a formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

The side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center of the game window 101 in the left-right direction on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the band-shaped lenses extend in the front side. The slits 251a of the decorative member 251 intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction.

The side inner lens 252 is configured such that the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion parts 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left-side decorative unit 240 are mounted with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs on their surfaces, and the large-sized lower-side decorative frame 242 and the upper-side decorative frame 244 are large. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60° to 180°) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15° to 60°).

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is invisible from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 from being broken and an unauthorized tool being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is adapted to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is unlikely to make noise to other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 including the curved peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface of the side lens 250 disposed behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left lower decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion part 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens portion 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is emitted to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions displaced from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape in the extending direction of the slit 251a and intersects by the diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of belt-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights of different shades that extend in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersect with the extending direction of the slit 251a. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and has the upper end edges on the center side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular center frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the center frame 281a in a slender shape to the left and right, and tapers toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 that is inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulges forward, and a plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 that is arranged on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 and has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a tube disposed on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at the rear side of the light shielding member 287 and corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged on the front surface of the upper central decoration substrate 288.

In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 for supporting the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. LED 290 a mounted on the upper side decoration board 290, a board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decoration board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from a lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and a lower side of the upper lower cover 293 having a large light-transmitting property and a predetermined size. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch portion 295a whose rear end side is open at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. ..

In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 glitters by the light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of radially extending belt-shaped lenses are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the extension frame lens portion 282c has a front surface centered on the axial center of the through hole 282a. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted, so that the rear surface is clear. Is not visible to.

Further, the upper central decoration substrate 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. In this upper side decoration substrate 290, the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281 can be made to emit light by appropriately emitting the LED 290a.

[1-2E. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is provided with the upper dish 301 and the lower dish 302 for storing the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and is also stored in the upper dish 301. The game ball T can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. When the upper plate main body 312 and the upper plate main body 312 are covered with a plate-shaped upper plate main body 312 that is fixed to approximately the center of the front surface and is open on the upper and rear sides and bulges to the front on the left side (shaft support side), the front end is the front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion. An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with and cover the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is provided.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to a plate-shaped board mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left-right center to the right side, and to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately emitting the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the dish unit 300, the lower side of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 to open the upper and rear sides, and the center in the left-right direction is bulged forward in front view and the front end is moved to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to increase toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower dish cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and a right side of the lower plate cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side. And a lower plate right side cover 330 having a lower opening portion 330b which is opened to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, in the plate unit 300, a diagonally extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers the left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower and upper ends of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are arranged at the lower end. A lower left side plate cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 formed of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower left side plate 334 from the rear side, and which allows sound to pass through, and A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. A cover body 339 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes that are loosely curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. In addition, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312, and the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls T stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and the lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls T stored in the lower plate 302, which is attached to the lower surface of the plate, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing the game balls T by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing the game balls T by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of this dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and an upper dish ball supply port 310c penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an upper dish ball supply. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction below the vicinity of the right end of the decorative portion 310a below the port 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between a pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a lower tray bowl supply port 310g having a rectangular shape which is arranged in a lower portion on the right side of the center of a portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and which penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball T can pass.

The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper dish ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls T stored in the upper dish 301, the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540. However, since it becomes impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid game ball T comes into contact with the game ball T that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Its rolling direction changes, and it is guided so as to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in a front view, and from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. Will be released. As a result, the game balls T can be automatically stored in the upper and lower tiers in the upper plate 301, so that when the game balls T block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player manually holds the game balls T. It is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid out game balls T into the upper plate 301 without collecting, and the player feels troublesome with respect to the storage of the game balls T in the upper plate 301. It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself to the driving operation of the game ball T and the game by the driven game ball T to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing, and at the same time, the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to increase the storage amount of T.

The upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

In addition, in this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k which is widened to the left in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by the widened portion 310k. The front end of 310 g spreads in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring early in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to the game balls T in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and more The game ball T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivotal support side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. In the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls T, which are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, and are supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301), are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It is supposed to be done.

The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can contact the game ball T from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged in the game ball T can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is installed. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for mounting the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decorative attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314 in a curved shape. The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces which are curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front part decoration member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decoration member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be seen clearly. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the feeling of distance is not fixed.

Further, the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle like the surface on the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. In addition to being formed integrally with the right side portion, the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of an upper plate ball removing button 341 of an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be diffused and refracted so that the player cannot clearly see the lower side. There is. The upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The bottom plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed in a fan shape that extends forward in a plan view, has a rear end formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and has a lower surface with a substantially central portion, and a central portion of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side edge is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening/closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin, and has a silver-colored plating layer on the surface thereof, which has a metallic feeling (matte state not sanding like a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion. The opening portion 334a of the lower left bottom cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 described later, and allows the sound from the speaker 821 to be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left bottom cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted inside.

In the plate unit 300 of this example, a bottom plate side cover 330 and a bottom plate left lower cover 334 are configured to close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction. The bottom surface between them is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

The upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removing button 341 which is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removing button 341. And the operation plate 342 that moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and that supports the operation plate 342 so that it can be operated (rotated) and the plate unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and contacts the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310, and an upper plate ball attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310 for slidably supporting the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the vertical direction. And a removal base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

The upper plate ball removing base 344 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharging port 310d of the plate unit base 310, and at the same time, communicates with the upper plate ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and a ball guide flow path 344b that guides the game ball T that communicates with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 42 and (See FIG. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the sphere guiding flow path 344b, extending toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c through which the playing game ball T can be distributed.

In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls T stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit. 580 can be supplied.

Further, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the tray unit base 310, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580. Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 are transferred from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball removal port 581b to the ball removal channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Note that the ball punching member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball punching slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition part 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like. Can be prevented from being damaged and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is disposed below the lower dish body 324 between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower left plate lower cover 334, and forms a lower plate central portion of the dish unit 300. The opening base 351 and the plate-like opening/closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening/closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. And a lower plate ball removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slider 353. There is.

This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating vertically in a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially match the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the up-down direction. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal base 351 so that the closing portion 352a closes the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. ..

Although not shown in detail, the opening/closing shutter 352 includes a contact pin capable of contacting the lower dish ball removing slider 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. You can do it.

Further, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, when the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening/closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball pulling slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower tray main body 324 lower tray ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening/closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls T can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removing button 354 in the closed state is pressed rearward, the lower plate ball removing button 354 and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower plate ball removing slider 353 slides rearward. The opening/closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

Then, as the opening/closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 holds the slide by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly opened and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls T retained in the extraction hole 3324b are held, and the game balls T stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the holding of the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower plate is removed. The opening/closing shutter 352 is configured such that the ball-sliding slide 353 is slidable, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower tray ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open/close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. The game ball T can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially matching the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like.

It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed rearward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and a player presses a ball rental button 361, a predetermined number of game balls T are placed in a dish unit. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper tray 301 of 300, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the loan will be returned. ing. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball lending unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 on the shaft support side (left side in front view).

More specifically, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front surface side of the loan-left display portion 363, a loan-left display portion 363 that is arranged on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a ball-rental button 361. And a ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch that is operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached thereto. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. The transparent front cover 365 includes a rectangular display opening 310n closed by a cover 365, and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward. The transparent front cover 365 closes the display opening 310n. The lending balance display portion 363 arranged on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end as shown in FIG.

As shown in the drawing, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged so as to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

In addition, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a protrusion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player's side) from the outer circumferences of the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362, so that when the player inserts his or her hand into the upper tray 301, Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having two storage plates and having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model of pachinko machine), it is possible to reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player and make it a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to select as a pachinko machine to play. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and the player can only hit the game ball T with the operation. Instead, it is possible to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed inside the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. A base member having a spring 418 biased upward, an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface. 420, an upper cover 422 that has an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 to pass through, and a base member 420 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420. A lower cover 424 that covers lower surfaces of the member 420 and the dial drive motor 414 is mainly provided.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged above the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430, on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring, and the operation section holding member 416, and detecting rotation of the dial operation section 401. 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extension surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a tubular shape, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. It mainly comprises a collar portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation portion 401 includes a connection locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operation portion 401 is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Furthermore, the dial operation portion 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylindrical portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, which will be described in detail later, and the step 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Note that, as shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so that the contact area becomes large when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation section 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation section 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation section 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation section 405 side. It has become.

The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 that is arranged inside 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is radiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower outer periphery and projecting outward at the lower end in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (depressing operation portion 405) does not rotate inside the button support cylinder 416b. It should be noted that a gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It is possible to rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 is provided with a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is adapted to be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Accordingly, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a lower surface on which an annular slide contacting the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 is made. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward, and these connecting locking claws 410b are included in the dial operation portion 401. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c which project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are adapted to be detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are connected to each other. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same circumferential length.

The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 drives the drive gear 412 to rotate via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, by rotating the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) in the forward and reverse directions in small steps by the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time for each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to add a feeling.

Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that projects cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button supporting cylinder 416b that slidably supports up and down, and a locking protrusion 416f (locking claw 406b of button body 406, which is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom in button supporting cylinder 416b and can be locked. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom center of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). An opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 can pass through the bottom part outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom part inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416e through which the press detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration board 432 is viewed from the upper side, and a pair of board holding claws 416g extending downward from the lower surface to hold the button decoration board 432. I have it.

Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406, and locks it. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button body 406 from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom inside the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is urged upward.

The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b, and which vertically penetrates the operation member holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward at least capable of accommodating the driven gear 410 are provided. I have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f opening downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e are provided.

In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from the outside of the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding to the bottom. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes, etc. at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower recess portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass through the opening 420a at the center. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can be slidably rotated in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has its lower end protruding outward. I have it. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off from the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

In the upper cover 422, the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape that substantially matches the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

As shown in the drawing, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from both left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although not shown in detail in the drawings, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be alleviated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection/non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described later in detail. .. In addition, the operation unit 400 gradually rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation portion 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely given to the player. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player from having less interest in the game. it can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and if the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is inevitably hit and the operation unit The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the concentration of hit impact can be suppressed and the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be prevented from being damaged. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb impact and load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the impact and the load can be received by the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, so that the impacts and the like from the operation portions 401 and 405 are dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts and the like. The operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can improve impact resistance and load resistance.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405 by coming into contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The portion supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operation portion 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 comes off from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation portion 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405 can be paid attention, the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and prevent it from getting tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be made eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is smaller than that of the dial operation portion 401, and the dial operation portion 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operating portion holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operating portion 401 can abut against the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operating portion 401 can be connected to the base member. It can be surely prevented from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operating portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operating portion 401 and the operating portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operating portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation motor 414 frequently rotates the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of being driven to rotate by, the amount of heat generated by the excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial driving motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated/dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial driving means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and the dial driving means 414 can be prevented. It becomes possible to endure a high load, and the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial driving means 414 as described above can be sufficiently embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player. can do.

Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and reduce the interest in the game. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 contact each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation portion 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 repeatedly oscillates the dial operation part 401 in the predetermined angle range by rotating it in the forward/reverse direction, thereby vibrating the dial operation part 401 through the step part 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation part 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, and entertaining the effect using the operation unit 400. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, and it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axis center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation portion 405, the dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to easily entertain the player using the operation unit 400 and guide the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405. The characters “PUSH” displayed can be easily read by the player without turning or tilting greatly, and the player can be sure to recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated by pressing. be able to.

Further, the dial operating portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operating portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined vertical position. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. Therefore, the gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be provided via the gap between the dial operation portion 401 and the pressing operation portion 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of a problem that the dial operation section 401 becomes difficult to rotate and the pressing operation section 405 becomes difficult to press due to the entry of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, a portion of the dial operation portion 401 in the circumferential direction is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is inclined (a position biased to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the pressing operation unit 405 is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The load resistance and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward/reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward/reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls T, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is probable to store a large number of game balls T. Is high, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to make the effect using the operation unit 400 easy to entertain.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion holes 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape, a handle main body 504 that is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the rear handle body 504.

Further, in the handle device 500, a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, and a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. The rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504. A handle return spring 522 that urges the handle return spring 522 so as to return it to the rotation end in the direction.

As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and bulges rearward and has a rear end portion that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking protrusion 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coil-shaped handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in the front view.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the turning operation can be performed easily without any discomfort.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the turning position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball T is driven. You can do it. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 by some method without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be driven. Instead, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing power supply board 831 stops the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like this. Thus, the firing of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520 is released, whereby the one-shot button 520 is not operated. The game ball T can be fired with the driving strength of.

In the handle device 500 of this example, after the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing power supply board 831 is operated. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed, and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and thus the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest due to a defect in driving the game ball T.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball T paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. Despite this, the game balls T (foul balls) that have not reached the inside of the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls T inside which is opened on the front side, and a front cover 544 closing a front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base which communicates with the first ball entrance. A first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view as it goes to the front end of 542, and a second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the second ball passage 542d and extends downward and is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower right corner in a front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the outer diameter of the game ball T, as shown in the figure. And, a storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls T is formed.

In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is open upward, and the game ball T can be guided to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d, which is in communication with the foul ball inlet 542e. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening/closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening/closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening/closing crank 793. The open/close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b which is arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a passes through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball. The upper plate 301 can be supplied from the outlet 544a through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball T supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball. The outlet 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball T fired by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball T received at the foul ball entrance 542e through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 ( Supply).

In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and is swingably covered by the game ball T stored in the accommodation space 546. A rocking member 548 pivotally supported by 542, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects rocking of the rocking member 548, and the rocking member 548 is biased by the full tank detection sensor 550 in a non-detecting state. And a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542 and an upper end that rotates leftward in a front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swing member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , Are provided, and the static electricity generated by the rolling resistance due to the circulation of the game ball T can be removed.

In this example, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. , When the upper bowl 301 is full and the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball T stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and the normal ball outlet in the full tank branching unit 770 is reached. When the normal passage 773 upstream of 774 is also filled up, the game ball T comes to flow to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch It is supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the unit 770 to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

When the lower bowl 302 of the dish unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d is placed. The delayed game balls T will be stored. Further, as the game balls T are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large amount of the game balls T are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls T acts on the swinging member 548, and the biasing force of the spring 552 is exerted. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left against this. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) stops the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700, and The player is notified that the game ball T in the dish unit 300 is discharged to the outside.

When the game ball T in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feeding unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The T can be drawn into the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340.

In this ball feeding unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has an opening 581a that penetrates through the front end and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a, and the rear end is opened, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 and the rear cover 582, which have a box shape and are provided with a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying the game ball T that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the ball hitting launcher 650, A ball removing member having a partition portion 583a that is pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 581 and has a partition 583a on the rear side of the front cover 581 to partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b. 583 and the game balls T on the partition part 583a of the ball removing member 583 are fed to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one and rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 that is movably supported and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584, and bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotatable rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90° about the axis of rotation. The ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball T. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball T held in the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launcher 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a, and enters the partition part 583a from the entrance 581a. Movement of the game ball T to the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking section 584a, and the gaming ball T remains on the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball T on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved back and forth by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip is vertically swung by the driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip which is vertically swung in the ball feeding operation rod 586. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a which is engageable with a vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 587a which engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation in FIG.

The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is swung by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 which moves forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball T, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launcher 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing power supply board 831 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

Further, although the ball removing member 583 rotatably supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example receives a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the weight portion 583c, The rotation of the operating rod 583c protruding forward is regulated by contacting the upper end of the abutting piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. At normal times, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball T does not enter the ball outlet 581b. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and abuts. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters through the partition 583a. The partition between the 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball T that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. And is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

The contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, so that the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 through the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball It is possible to prevent T from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

Further, in the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward is formed in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a laterally long overall outer diameter when viewed from the rear, and is substantially opposite to the center in the vertical direction at the tip that is the left side when viewed from the rear side. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c are V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the tamperproof member 588 (rearward) so as to move away from each other. It has a character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cutting portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time, is formed so as to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the ball striking device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is played by the ball striking device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, and passes between the outer rail and the inner rail. Attempt to enter the game area 1100. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance in the passage. Therefore, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move to the shortest route, the ball is drawn toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the illegal momentum of the game ball I.

Thereby, the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 by the momentum of the illegal game ball I. Then, the cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 57D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened by the momentum due to friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111a and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed in the game area 605 with the illegal game ball I attached with the wire rod Iw. It is possible to prevent people from getting caught. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588 as described above, and thus the illegal act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the force of the illegal game ball I and the gaming area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity from being performed.

As described above, according to this example, after storing the game balls T in the upper plate 301 and supplying the game balls T to the ball feeding unit 580, the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is played. When a person operates, the game ball T is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650, whereby the door frame 5 The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game window 101, and the player can be entertained, and at the same time, the feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or Since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball feeding solenoid 585) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583) is arranged, not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device. 650 is also as close as possible, and when the game balls T in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the number of the game balls T remaining on the ball feeding member 584 side can be set as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 and hit the game ball T. It is possible to prevent the game ball T in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the insertion operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game ball T early, and the game in the upper plate 301 can be suppressed. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed with respect to the ball T and to suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, It is possible to make the game area 1100 relatively large (wide) so that the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball removing member 583, compared with a case where the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 are separately provided, the ball feeding unit 580 is simply attached to the ball feeding member 580. 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the labor for assembling can be simplified. With the game ball T, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be easily replaced. Even if a problem occurs, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 which can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared to the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism will be consumed early and malfunction or be damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580 and the like. And durability can be improved.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game ball T can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate. The discharge of the game ball T from 301 can be stopped, and the player can easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

Further, the partition plate 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, since the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, the horizontal movement range of the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the partition 583a can be made as small as possible, and the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding mechanism can be used. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is biased upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 connects the entrance 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball T from the upper plate 301 vigorously contacts the partition part 583a, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition part 583a (ball removing part The durability of the member 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball T collides with the partition 583a, it can be made difficult to repel. It is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged due to the splashing of the blade and causing a problem.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partition portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removing button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. The same effect can be achieved.

Further, since the partition part 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entry port 581a and the ball removal port 581b communicate with each other, when a problem occurs in the partition part 583a or the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340, the partition part 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and the outlet are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (feeding device) side even though the discharge operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it can be made known to the player that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and it can be moved to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Furthermore, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-removing member 583 is rotated through the curved rotating rod portion 583b, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is bent. Dispersion by the portion 583b or absorption by bending of the rotating rod portion 583b can prevent linear impact from being transmitted to the rotating shaft, and durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580. It is possible to minimize the movement in the left and right directions, improve the passage of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball T well. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even with the ball removing member 583, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the attachment recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball launching device 650. As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire rod Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting concave portion 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, it is necessary to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent rearward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material sandwiched therebetween. Since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is substantially the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a arranged on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engaging piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. And a stop 592b.

In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to be engaged with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the upper rear side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration of the door frame 5, that is, the geometrical decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls T arranged vertically below the vertically oblong game window 101. Along with the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 are driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. A handle device 500 for Further, the door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

The door frame 5 has greatly different appearances on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a natural rock rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decorative unit 240, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved plane shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, when viewed from the right front, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be similar to each other (see FIG. 19 ), but the left front When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to give the illusion of a pachinko machine of a different model. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player, and can strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetrical, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are lined up in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, etc., the overall appearance of the island facility feels flat and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is possible to perform light emission decoration in any color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 can be turned on or off to change the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and the gaming window 101 is made to emit each LED as appropriate. The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left-right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is included. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and is on the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It has LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), white coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and look bad, and by reflecting the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light toward the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which are oriented toward the left-right center of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central decoration substrate 288 disposed behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decoration substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the extended frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to separately decorate and light. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be illuminated and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the outer appearance is continuous with the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322 allow the upper plate front decorative member 316 to operate. The upper plate upper right decorative member 319 for decorating the right side portion and the outer periphery on the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmitting cylindrical pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which cover the outer circumference above the lower side of the game window 101, correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60), and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, a substantially concentric shape is formed so as to surround the game window 101. A plurality of (two in this example) light-emitting decorations can be provided. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper center group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper center of the. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. Further, the LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that lights up and decorates both left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged on the lower side of the game window 101 is used to make the upper plate 301 emit light. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used to perform light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be notified.

The light emission decoration of the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include the LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 sandwiched therebetween as a set, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. No. 2 system, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In light emission control, the number is 84 times, which is three times as large. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system, so that the same number of systems is used for the actual light emission control, that is, ten systems.

Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) to spread outward with the game window 101 as the center. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by making the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 is made to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged further outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, by making each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j emit light as appropriate, the upper part of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

Furthermore, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect of radially emitting light around the game window 101 is made, or at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, a light emission effect of causing the entire periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting/blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light It is possible to give a luminous effect by giving an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by individually emitting light from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to provide a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) are rotated.

Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation gaming state, a time shortening gaming state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making it emit light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guides the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108,. For each 109 or each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light emission effect with different gradations of light emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and a main body frame base 600. The ball hitting device 650 which is attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and the game ball T to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The prize ball unit 700 for paying out, and the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the body frame base 600 and is opened with respect to the body frame 3. And a ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 for shutting off the flow.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 other than the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unitized body of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view that is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability in assembling the main body frame 3 is improved. Is able to improve.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part, and a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 is held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in front view, a front frame of the front end frame portion 602 recessed rearward from the front surface, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 Of the door frame projection 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bending projection 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 606. Positioning projections 607 that project upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and that engage with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1112 of the game board 4, and a predetermined position of the inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the right side in front view are formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but its movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left end portion in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft supporting metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft supporting metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the right end upper part of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

In the main body frame base 600 of this example, as described above, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further toward the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front side from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball T is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front, and above the openings 614 and on the left and right sides when viewed from the front. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is configured to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and the lower rear wall portion 604 passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having a collision wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view to the front and regulates the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis centered on the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and the fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise in a front view). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by coming into contact with the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Is becoming

Further, in the body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front-rear direction on the inner side (shaft support side) of the engaging groove 603 on the right (open side) side in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in two left-right directions are provided below the lower door hook hole 620. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000 is performed. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper end on the right side toward the center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the center in the left-right direction, the lower rear wall part 604. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 in which the game ball T hangs down from the middle of the vertical direction to a position slightly above. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed to be closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the details will be described later, but the game ball T that has flowed through the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Are now in circulation.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided at the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 605 at the rear end of the rear side as viewed from the rear, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed on.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 using the predetermined screws on the front end left end upper and lower rear surface front views of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extending portion 632, the shaft supporting pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft supporting pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 in a front view to the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the end. In this upper shaft support member 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extending portion. A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

In addition, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 of the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being vertically separated by a predetermined distance. It is like this.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are positioned on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal member 644 of the lower shaft support metal member 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal member 21 of the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are positioned coaxially with each other, and the door pin 5 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame fitting hole 642c of the door frame fitting 642 of the lower fitting 640. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 in an openable and closable manner. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is not supported. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically stacked, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. This hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball T supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. Is.

In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a trajectory of movement of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of the ball hammer 656 is provided between the launch rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left in a front view and attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. A ball stopper 662 that holds the game ball T at the base end of the launch rail 660 and a base end of the launch rail 660 is formed by the ball stopper 662 while forming a gap in which the game ball T cannot pass through at the same time as allowing the passage of 658. And a stopper 664 for restricting rotation of the batting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) to the launch rail 660 side from a batting position at which the gaming ball T held at can be struck.

Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball hammer 656 of the ball-striking launcher 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b facing the normal direction and having a mallet tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c extending toward the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664 are provided. ing. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111a of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is V-shaped, and the game ball T hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. .. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting the turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a turning position of the hitting mallet 656 apart from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 that regulates the end (rotating end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts can be absorbed, and the generation of noise due to abutting is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc., when the ball hitting launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is at the center in the left-right direction, The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, lower than the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601), is located outside the game board 4 held in the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111a and the rail 1111a. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball T so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660, so as to bring the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It is possible to drive. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball T, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching power supply board 831 with a driving strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball T to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball T, and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585. When the driving of is released (OFF), the game ball T received by the ball feeding member 584 is designed to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Therefore, the ball sending solenoid 585 of this ball sending unit 580 and the launch solenoid are almost simultaneously released. By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting mallet 656. You can do it.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then pays out a predetermined amount. Based on the instruction, the pachinko machine 1 is dispensed to the upper plate 301. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls T supplied from the island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligned with the game balls T stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side, and a game ball T aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on a predetermined payout instruction and the game ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball T. When it becomes, it is mainly provided with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the paid game ball T to the lower plate 302 side.

In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is formed integrally with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. This prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

In addition, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal board mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, a prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward, and An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a mounting hole, a mounting boss, or the like for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, or the like, or the body frame base 600. Is formed on.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a horizontally long bottom wall in a plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has a rectangular right-side rear portion (rear portion on the open side) that projects rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion 722. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear portion projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the rear part 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall 722. An attaching portion 726 for attaching the 720 to the award ball tank attaching portion 711 of the award ball base 710.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, in the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lower toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It is like this.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end side hangs down by its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that the game balls T circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent the game ball T from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the tank rail unit 730.

Although not shown in detail, the top surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723 in a plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls T can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball T can be smoothly discharged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with a predetermined depth that is open at the upper side, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls T to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that the part is low. This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) that project further downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

This tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located immediately below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It is provided with a piece 735 and an earth plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball T in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball T partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball T that has not been stepped up by the ball leveling member 727 to the next level, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 so that

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 are axially supported so as to shift by half pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball T flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T arranged in two rows are alternately arranged one by one. It is designed to be sent to the prize ball device 740.

It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball T inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 can be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball T with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated, and the projecting piece 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 a to the inside of the tank rail 730. By inserting into the tank rail 731, it is possible to close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and to stop the supply of the game ball T to the prize ball device 740 side. ing.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game ball T or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game ball T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 has a supply opening to the upper end on the rear surface side and extending to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball T. A passage 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (opening side) in rear view A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface in the view, and a ball removal passage 741d communicating with the lower end (right side of the rear side) of the distribution space 741b in rear view and extending downward and opening to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated with each other. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741 are the third gear. A rotation detection board 749 having a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a that are fixed integrally rotatably on the opposite side across the 747 and are equally spaced in the circumferential direction.

In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a, and the game ball T that is attached to the unit base 741 and flows in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number of rotation angles, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 for holding the rotation angle sensor 752 on the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, which relays the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting sensor 751, the rotation angle sensor 752, and the payout control board 4110. , Are provided.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749). ), and a sensor cover 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 sandwiched therebetween, and a supply passage that can contact the game ball T circulating in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. An earth metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and a screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and a back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. A detachable button 759 is provided.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball passage passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 is relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward partially cut out and outside the cutout position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating portion in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. The presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e by pressing the operating piece by the game ball T. In a state where the game ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball-out switch 741e (ball-out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the player is out of ball. The hall will be notified.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed on the upper part of the unit base 741. I have it. This unit base 741 is configured such that the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is attached to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i so that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T flowing in the supply passage 741a through the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 is in the form of a vertically long plate as a whole, and has an upper end bulged rearward. A button insertion hole 742a for inserting the attachment/detachment button 759 is formed on the upper portion of the back cover 742, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on a substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting The sensor substrate mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and the through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. The heat can be easily dissipated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and payout rotation. By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recesses 748a one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball passage passage 741d. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is designed to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. .. On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball removing passage 741d side. The game ball T paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side by 748 is a ball removal passage 778 of a full tank distribution unit 770, which will be described later, a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. The board unit 800 can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the unit base 741 is assembled to the main body frame 3, the award from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, the game balls T can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 when the game balls T are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300.

The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the upper part of the rear end on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base 710 is By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole is lowered as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened upward in the substantial center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving the game ball T that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanding in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). ), and a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T from immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and discharges the game ball T flowing through the normal passage 773 to the front. A normal ball outlet 774 that is open to the front end right end of the front end and a full tank passage 775 that guides the game ball T toward the front side from a position farther to the right in the rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 ( (See FIG. 79), and a full-ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball T flowing through the full-tank passage 775 to the front and opens to the left side of the normal-ball outlet 774 in front view.

Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removing port 777 that opens upward at the left end in front view of the rear end upper part and receives the game ball T flowing down the ball removing passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T received in the ball removal receiving port 777 to the front side, and the game ball T that has flowed through the ball removal passage 778 is discharged to the front and the normal ball at the left end in front view. The outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are provided with a ball outlet 779 that opens at a position rearward.

In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are arranged to face each other and communicate with each other, and the game ball T discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and the dish unit 300. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 of the plate tank 300 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. There is. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 of the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear side, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 779 is the body frame base. It is designed to be delivered to the main body frame base removal passage 622 of 600.

In this full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball T that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball T flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 through the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b and the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

By the way, when the game ball T is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) while the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game ball T, the first of the foul cover units 540 is released. The game ball T, which cannot be discharged from the ball outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 side, stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770 to the upstream normal passage 773. The inside becomes full. In this state, the game ball T that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball T entered into the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776, the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b through the dish unit 300. Is supplied to the lower plate 302.

The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. ..

In this way, in the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the game ball T becomes full in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is played until the full game tank T is released. , As it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate is filled up like a conventional pachinko machine and the game ball T is supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate. It can be avoided that the driving of the game ball T is interrupted because it is not performed, and the annoyance during the game can be eliminated and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the upper plate 301 is full, passes directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, the passage of the game ball T paid out at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls T that have been branched and accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls T in the upper plate 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773. Is a game ball T that can be directly driven by the ball launching device 650, and the storage amount of the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773 combined. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls T as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 small, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 and play. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the inlet (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c are provided, the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game ball T in the main body frame 3. At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost required for the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 for changing the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

Further, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame provided with only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged with 5, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being deteriorated due to a shortage of the game balls T for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. Has become.

Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so the frequency of transferring the game balls T stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is increased. It is possible to reduce the number of players, and the player can concentrate on the driving operation of the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Moreover, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls T by making the storage tray deep, without the player having to worry about the storage amount frequently. Along with being able to play games, it is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 of the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game balls T. Even if the game ball T cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774 as a tan, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is possible as much as possible. It is possible to increase the total amount of the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, the storage tray becomes full with the game balls T, and the game balls T cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 773 and the full tank outlet 776. Also, since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many not only the normal passage 773 but also the full tank passage 775. The game ball T can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of the game ball T stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls T in each door frame 5 can be changed without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of maximizing the number and sufficiently corresponding to different door frames 5.

In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a size such that the gaming balls T can be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the amount of retention of the gaming ball T in the full tank branching unit 770 (amount of storage) ) Can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, the substantial storage amount of the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be avoided and can be adapted to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game ball T in the main body frame 3.

In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770, which causes a problem. When it occurs, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the problem early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening/closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball T.

The ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; an opening/closing crank 793 for sliding the opening/closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction; And an opening/closing spring 794 that biases the

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening/closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view and that supports the opening/closing crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening/closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged near the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening/closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape, which is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening/closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view. From the right side to the right, and the tip extends to the vicinity of the center of the opening 791b in the left-right direction, and the drive rod 793b is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening/closing shutter 792 by protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open/close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are formed of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised, the shutter base 791 and the opening/closing shutter 792 are arranged on the rear side through the opening/closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, etc. in the full tank branching unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 of this example, the opening/closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, whereby the drive pin 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 rotates in an arc shape in the vertical direction, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening/closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening/closing crank 793 contacts the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in the front view against the biasing force of the opening/closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening/closing shutter 792 descends so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the opening/closing crank 793 and the opening/closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening/closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by the urging force of the opening/closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening/closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, in response to opening/closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening/closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T spills from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full ball outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A firing power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear surface and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And a terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front, a main-side relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and a peripheral-side relay. And a terminal plate 882.

The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that protrudes forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the position of the shield wall portion 811 at the center in the left-right direction and that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a horizontally long rectangular shape on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. Cylindrical duct portion 814 penetrating through, a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the rear view left side (front view right side) The upper rear surface is provided with a box housing portion 816 which is opened rearward and upward and can house the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board base unit 810, through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction, the game ball T that has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can send it.

In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forwarded from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 to the front side. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted to the front. ing.

The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The launch power supply board box 830 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launch power supply board 831 therein, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like via the slits 830a formed in the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 844 of a power board box holder 840 which will be described later and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thus, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC/DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC/DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC/DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC/DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, in the power source board box 830, a partition wall 830b that partitions the internal space into two spaces, a space for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is formed on the upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , And a housing space 830d for housing the DC/DC converter 831a and the housing space 830d function as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC/DC converter 831a. In addition, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC/DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC/DC converter 831a from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the combined current flowing in the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its small size, and the replacement operation of the emission power supply board 831 can be facilitated, which can contribute to the reduction of the time spent for the exchange operation. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the launch power supply board box 830 with the launch power supply board 831 attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the entire launch power supply board box 830.

Moreover, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply board 831 can be performed. Since it can be easily performed, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to very easily eliminate the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire and restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a direct current power supply from an alternating current power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. The life of the emission power supply board 831 is extremely longer than that of the emission power supply board 831. In other words, the emission power supply substrate 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply substrate 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC/DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are provided not on the power supply board 851 but on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term aging of the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short service life.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached and detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 holding the game board 4, the capacitance for changing the hitting characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach and attach the launch power board 831, which makes it difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it harder to carry out fraud, and it is possible to prevent fraud that intentionally changes the optimized striking strength by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831, and at the same time make fraud difficult to carry out. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who feels irritated from developing into fraud such as fraud.

Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power supply board 831 is tampered with, the emission power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to tamper with it. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, a launch power supply board 831 equipped with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4, so that the model can be changed. When the game board 4 is replaced, the launching power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) can also be easily replaced, so that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like that can realize the driving characteristics matching the concept of the new model to be replaced, etc. By changing to the launch power supply board 831 provided with the DC/DC converter 831a, it is possible to make the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 match the new game board 4. it can. Therefore, the driving characteristic of the game ball T can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 can be attached and detached from the front side, when exchanging the launch power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 with respect to the island facility such as a game hall, and the time and labor required for the replacement are reduced. It can be simplified and can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the cost for changing the driving characteristic can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire payout control board 4110 is replaced. It is possible to reduce the burden on the hall side.

Further, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. Therefore, a problem occurs due to the deterioration, and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to eliminate the problem. It is possible to shorten the period of interruption of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detachable. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the game board 4 causes an illegal tool to reach the firing power supply board 831. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently performed, and the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Further, the launching power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position supporting the launching power supply board box 830 is rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the board box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and exerts the above-described effects.

Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached/detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

In addition, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 has the game ball T discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 which is opened upward on the left front side with respect to the left-right center in a front view. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 to be received, the discharge passage 842 for guiding and discharging the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and the side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) Of the power supply board box 850, which is opened forward and upward on the front surface of the power supply board box 830 and is capable of accommodating the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840. And a rear box accommodation portion 844 capable of accommodating the front end.

The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the board unit base 810 is formed by flowing through the body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the board base unit 810. After the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842, the game ball T that has flowed into the game ball T and the game ball T that has been discharged from the out ball discharge part 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving part 841 will be described later. It can be discharged to the lower side.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810. The recess can be formed.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close a front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like is externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall protruding rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 on the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c that project rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 that is disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 is prevented from coming off from the power supply terminal 853.

In the power supply board box 850, as shown in FIG. 87, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 is connected to the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. Is formed so as to project. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, when connecting the connector terminal where the wiring cord is extended to the connection terminal attached to the board and then pulling the wiring cord toward the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. There is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal because it is pressed against the terminal side. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. A force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side can be prevented from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be made hard to come off and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately folded back to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d after the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b. It can be performed, and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

In addition, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 that faces the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850b that projects rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is fixed to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is easy to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 that is extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which may cause a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851 and to be mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the electric power source and the power supply terminal 851 from coming off from the power supply substrate 851 due to the breakage of the power supply board 851.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 through the direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with projections 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if the wiring cord 854 is slid along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, it is difficult for the wiring cord 854 to be removed from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of operations continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating/cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating/cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball-removing switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc., which are attached to the payout control board 4110, face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 having a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface of the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in a rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. Also, a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873 are provided.

The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal board 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the contents of the error code displayed on the frequency display installed on the island facility side, the CR unit 6 or the like are displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) which is formed on an upper inner side of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes an upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on a lower inner side of the board mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

In addition, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference thereof is sized so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall thereof is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outside of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The ridge 871e of the board base 871 has a state in which the amount of rearward projection is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c. It is located so that it is close to

Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover attachment portion 871b in the rear view in a vertically spaced manner so as to vertically support the board box cover 875, and a pair of bearing portions 871g and a left end in the back view. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the up-down direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending forward from 873a (on the side of the board base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement member that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be engaged with the engagement hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with its front side opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving backward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. Is becoming Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

The CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. Besides, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting with the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front and rear from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b. And a locking piece 875d which is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be opened and closed. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side that is pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is used as the D-sub connector, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of the present example, in the assembled state, has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier is constructed and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an illegal tool having excellent flexibility is made to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if a D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

Further, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool is inserted into the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

Further, when the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board are arranged in the direction along the front surface (the back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion of the base 871 and the 871c are arranged, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d and the board of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists respectively, a barrier due to multiple layers is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. By analogy, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is allowed to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal board is provided. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the 874, and to reliably prevent an unauthorized act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The pachinko machine 1 can be used.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, it is possible to cover the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraud.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped collision wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are axially supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and an unauthorized tool is allowed to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected by the collision wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against misconduct. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the wiring cord side terminal connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, an illegal act will be performed. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, outside the terminal board box 870. The needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, and high crime prevention capability. Can be one.

Further, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It is possible to keep the protection of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874a and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874a. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such as.

Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. Since it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activity and it is easy to detect fraudulent activity, it is possible to hesitate to perform fraudulent activity for those who perform fraudulent activity, and enhance deterrence against fraudulent activity. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 5 so that the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR It is possible to easily inspect the unit connection terminal board 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870.

The main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in FIG. 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching the connecting terminals to the attaching portion 813, the connecting terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered with a relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, as shown in FIGS. 61 and 63. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal board 880 is provided with a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a loan remaining display portion 363, a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control board 4010 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main body portion 902 in front view. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking port 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally elongated slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, which is attached so as to sandwich the guide member 923. And a holding member 925. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

In the state where the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 that is inserted through the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 that is locked in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900, The state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw part 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw part 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

In addition, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one location, so that the fastening and fastening can be performed simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one location. It can be released and the back cover 900 can be opened and closed easily and the maintainability can be improved.

In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out upward in a rectangular shape at the lower end of the main body 902 on the right side in a front view, and a confirmation opening that penetrates a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connection cutout 910 in a front view. The main body 902 includes a main body 902 and a confirmation cutout 914 cut out in a rectangular shape at a lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is in a state of being closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 1103a of the main control board box 1103 and the test terminal 1103b of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4 through the connection cutout portion 910. Is facing the rear side. In addition, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1103c (see FIG. 5) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1103, which faces the rear side through the checking opening 912, and is used for checking. The sealing portion 1103d of the main control board box 1103 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Accordingly, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of elongated slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 of the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows in the left-right direction at predetermined intervals. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the effect display device 1115 on the game board 4 is provided. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 4010 and the like provided therein, so that heat from the peripheral control board 4010 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball T, so that the game ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

Thereby, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since the game board 4 is held by the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even when the fastening of the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being retained by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900, and the fastening member 924 is removed from the back cover 900. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from falling off.

Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, and therefore it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since it can be held near the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be secured in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap between and the slot 923b.

Further, an accommodation recess for accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover of the main body frame 3. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screw-coupled with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it can be tightened only by pulling as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Furthermore, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921), It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or move the male screw portion 924 straightly with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. Therefore, the male screw part 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking opening. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 movably mounted is extended in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be pivotally moved around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908 for engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the rear cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3 to achieve the fastening by the fastening member 924. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 at only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Lock device]
Subsequently, the locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in an upper part of a right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in a lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 has a lateral width that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is formed by a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the left-right dimension of the lock device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the left-right dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, so that the game area can be further increased. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts against the lock device 1000 from the outside.

In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). The hook through opening 1002, the upper side of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle, and the screw stopper portion An upper end portion and a middle portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the protruding portion 1003 is provided, and the front end protrudes from the lower ends of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side. Locking projection 1004.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 603 of the main body frame base 600 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, when the screw locking portion 623 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw locking portion 1003 is aligned. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attaching portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the screw stopper 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described below and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also attached to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, lower, middle and upper sides are provided with the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes. Since it has a structure in which the locking device 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting part 625 with a screw, the locking device 1000 has a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and locking the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure on the rear side is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. A rivet 1006 is inserted into the insertion hole 1005 and caulked in a state where the body frame sliding rod 1050 is housed, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper ends of the rivet elongated holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Thus, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof, and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 when the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are mounted at two upper and lower positions so as to be mounted with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 that biases the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and a side escape hole 1022 that forms an escape hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Equipped with.

The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement projection piece 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in upper and lower two locations of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly move the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire to illicitly move the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 is opened vertically in the plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely above and diagonally so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown by the arrow (clockwise in FIG. 97(B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from an outer side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restricting protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 that penetrate through the restricting protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

In addition, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with the horizontally elongated opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. You can do it. Furthermore, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second tampering prevention member 1032 connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "te" shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three positions at the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side of the door. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.). It can be engaged with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. It should be noted that the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed at the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided. The rivet elongated hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is attached to the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that has penetrated the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with it. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at an upper end portion for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is urged upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement projection 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049, which is notched larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 in the up-down direction, at the lower rear of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 interferes with the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. Is equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and is made of a metal including an upper hook member 1051 and a lower hook member 1052 having hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently housed in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating in a lateral direction on a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper inside of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

Further, the rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In the normal state where the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1040 are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured so that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from a lower end portion and a rivet penetrating left and right in the vicinity of an upper end of a plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The long hole 1061, the lower engaging hole 1062 arranged below the long hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the lower engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. The rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and is rotated, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotating operation. Are for engaging. In addition, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engaging projection 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 so that the second engaging projection 1018 does not interfere with the rotating operation of the second engaging projection 1018. The distal end of the can form a movable space. A guide protrusion 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding member 1040 are inserted. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without any play.

Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding member. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base body 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the bottom end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is connected to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix it to the screw 1029 with a screw (not shown), and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is spanned between the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second improper prevention. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction projection 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

As described above, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 forming the locking structure of the front part is projectingly formed on the side surface 1001a which is not in contact with the peripheral wall part 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 while the rear part is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 96(A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 are engaged with the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(B). The tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 has an upper side inclined downwardly toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts on the lower end portion, the body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are re-engaged. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96(C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 to push the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

Note that when the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by contacting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward hooking portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are again locked to each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portions 1041 that are attached over the entire length and that are engaged with the door frame 5 are formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

As described above, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the door frame 5 can be unlocked from the body frame 3. In addition, the locking device 1000 of this example does not engage in an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding bar 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in the state of having done. In this state, the first tampering prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise by the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 tampering prevention notch. It is in a state of engaging with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even when a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the body frame 3 is unlocked properly, as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engaging protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engaging protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a whole, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hook portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Therefore, the first tampering prevention member 1023 and the second tampering prevention member 1023. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. 97(A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97(A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after releasing, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For that reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 are pulled down. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, it is not possible to easily commit illicit acts.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has a door frame sliding rod 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose lateral width is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the conventional L-shaped base is integrated. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base body 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is extremely increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw locking portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, middle and lower sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the structure is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

In the locking device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although a structure is shown in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed, the screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used instead, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached with the lock. A lock mounting hole that is screwed through the piece 1008 may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are shown to be completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod are provided in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The structure may be such that 1050 is housed, and the same operational effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 720 that stores the amusement ball T, which stores the amusement ball T supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the amusement ball T discharged from the award ball tank 720, are aligned to the rear wall of the award ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the portion 710b, and a game ball T discharged from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. After the prize ball base 710. A part of the prize ball device 740, which is attached to the rear side of the wall portion 710b, is transparent, and a side part 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 or the prize ball device 740. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as the rear of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. Side and rear side surface can be visually recognized, and the back side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 covering the back side of the game board 4. It can be 1.

Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, a waste cloth for cleaning, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is attached to and detached from the front side of the 601 side, remove them. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

Furthermore, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear surface or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it is possible to easily find out, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts are performed, and it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4, or the game board 4 is used. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described operational effects are reliably exhibited. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it can be caught or abutted on other members in the installed island equipment. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of trouble. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the accumulation efficiency (storing efficiency) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like, so the game board It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like more visible, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, and the trouble such as the deformation of the member such as the synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Further, the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size such that the game ball T cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball T spills to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from entering the pachinko machine 1 through the like, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball T entering.

[2. Game board configuration]
The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to the frame-shaped front component member 1111 that partitions the outer peripheral side of the game area 1100 and the rear side of the front component member 1111. The game area 1100 is provided with a flat game panel 1112 that defines the rear end side.

The outer peripheral shape of the front component 1111 is formed in a quadrangle, and the inner peripheral shape is formed such that the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view is a substantially semi-circular shape and the right side is a substantially U-shape. The front constituent member 1111 forms a first inner wall portion (outer rail) 1111a that is smoothly connected to the entire semi-circular portion on the inner peripheral surface and a portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion. In the U-shaped portion, the remaining vertically extending portion and the lower left and right extending portion form an L-shaped second inner wall portion 1111b. The front component member 1111 is a guide wall extending in an arc shape along the first inner wall portion 1111a from the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b (the left end of the portion extending left and right in front view) to the vicinity of the upper left corner in front view. An (inner rail) 1111c and a check piece 1111d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guide wall 1111c are provided.

The game panel 1112 has an out port 1112a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front component member 1111 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 1112a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 and the lower end of the guide wall 1111c are connected. In addition, the game panel 1112 is formed with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the game area 1100.

Further, the game board 4 includes a board holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the board holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. Main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) housed inside and controlling game contents, and a function attached to the front component member 1111 for displaying a game state and the like based on a control signal from the main control board 4100. And a display 1114.

Further, the game board 4 is mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112, and on the rear side of the display panel 1115 for main control. A peripheral control board 4010 that controls the effect display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the board 4100. Further, the game board 4 includes a front unit 1120 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100, and a back unit 3000 (see FIG. 6) attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112. , Are provided.

The table unit 1120 is attached to the center of the game area 1100 in a front view and divides the game area 1100 into right and left, and a center prize 1130 attached to the lower side of the center accessory 1130. And a unit 1150.

[2-1. Center goods]
The center accessory 1130 is formed in a frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side into the opening of the game panel 1112. This center accessory 1130 emits the warp entrance 1131 into which the game ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view and the game ball T that has entered the warp entrance 1131 and opens at the lower part in the center in the left-right direction in front view. And a warp outlet 1132.

On the right side of the center accessory 1130 as viewed from the front, the right flow path 1133 through which the game ball T can flow, and the game ball T that has been driven into the right flow path 1133 (right hit) can pass. A gate member 1134 that is present and a gate sensor 1135 that detects passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 are provided.

The right flow path 1133 is an opening that opens upward below the stop portion 1111e where the first inner wall portion 1111a and the second inner wall portion 1111b at the upper right corner in front view intersect with each other in the front component member 1111. A mouth 1133a, an entrance path 1133b for guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, a gate space 1133c of a predetermined size in which a gate member 1134 is arranged in the center, which is connected to the lower end of the entrance path 1133b, A guide path 1133d for guiding the game ball T downward from a lower end of the gate space 1133c along a part of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 and a lower end of the guide path 1133d are opened to lower the game ball T. And a discharge port 1133e for discharging to

The right channel 1133 has an entrance 1133a opening larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and an entrance path 1133b continuing to the entrance 1133a has a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball T on the lower end side. It is formed so that it becomes narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c greatly expands vertically and horizontally under the entrance path 1133b, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball T to flow down on the left and right sides of the gate member 1134 arranged at the substantially center. In the gate space 1133c, the gate member 1134 is arranged at a position slightly rightward in front view from directly below the approach path 1133b. The bottom surface of the gate space 1133c is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side in front view, and the upper end of the guideway 1133d is opened at the lowest right end portion.

The guide path 1133d extends in an arc shape along a vertically extending portion of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the inner wall of the guide path 1133d, and the abutment speed of the game ball T can be suppressed by abutting the game ball T on these protrusions. This guideway 1133d extends downward to a height that is about half the height of the game area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guide path 1133d opens slightly to the left when viewed from the front.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the winning unit]
The winning opening unit 1150 is arranged below the discharge opening 1133e of the right channel 1133 in the center accessory 1130, and is a general winning entrance 1151 that can always receive the game ball T, and a warp exit 1132 of the center accessory 1130. A first starting opening 1152 arranged on the lower side and capable of always receiving the game ball T, and a second starting opening arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 1152 in a front view and always opening into the game area 1100. 1153, a big winning opening 1154 which is arranged below the first starting opening 1152 and which can receive the game ball T by opening and closing according to the game state, and arranged on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 in front view. The prize winning opening 1155 in which the game ball T can be received by opening and closing according to the game state, and the game placed in the prize winning opening 1155 and received in the prize winning opening 1155 are arranged. It is provided with a V winning opening 1156 capable of receiving the ball T.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a first starting opening 1152 and is a flat plate base plate 1160 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1112, and mounted on the front surface of the base plate 1160. A transparent front passage forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a passage of the game ball T, and a transparent front surface attached to the front side of the front passage forming member 1161. A decorative plate 1162, an attacker unit 1200 arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and provided with a special winning opening 1154, and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the front of the attacker unit 1200. The variable starting port unit 1210, which is arranged obliquely on the upper right side and is provided with the second starting port 1153 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the variable starting port unit 1210, which is arranged on the right side in front view. In addition, it has an accessory winning hole 1155 and a V winning opening 1156, and an accessory unit 1220 attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160.

Furthermore, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and guides the first starting opening 1163 for guiding the game ball T received in the first starting opening 1152 downward, and the first starting opening. The ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the guide member 1163 for detecting the game ball T received in the first starting opening 1152, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the ball detecting sensor 1164 arranged behind the first starting opening 1152. The first starting opening decoration substrate 1165, the board stay 1166 that supports the first starting opening decoration substrate 1165 and is attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163, and the base at a position below the attacker unit 1200. The board 1160 is equipped with a special winning opening decoration substrate 1167 mounted on the rear side of the plate 1160 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof.

The winning opening unit 1150 is arranged on the rear side of the base plate 1160, above the second starting opening 1153, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the second starting opening decoration board 1168 and the second starting opening. A starter reflector 1169 that covers the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and is attached to the variable starter unit 1210, and a second starter 1153 that is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 at a position below the variable starter unit 1210. The guide member 1170 for the second starting opening that guides the game ball T received in the downward direction, and the game ball T that is attached to the second starting opening guide member 1170 and received in the second starting opening 1153 is detected. A ball detection sensor (not shown), an attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 attached to the rear side of the second starting port guide member 1170, a starting port solenoid 1215 of the variable starting port unit 1210, and a main control board 4100. A first relay board 1172 that relays the connection of the first relay board 1172 and a board cover 1173 that covers the rear side of the first relay board 1172 and is attached to the rear side of the second starting port guide member 1170.

Further, the winning prize unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the accessory unit 1220, and the accessory unit cover 1174 is located above the accessory winning port 1155. A prize winning opening decoration substrate 1175 arranged on the upper part of the front surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a prize winning prize attached to the accessory unit cover 1174 that covers the front side of the prize winning opening decoration substrate 1175. Mouth reflector 1176, vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of accessory unit cover 1174, vibration sensor 1177 attached to the lower front portion of accessory unit cover 1174, accessory winning solenoid 1225 of accessory unit 1220. And a second relay board 1178 for relaying the connection between the V winning solenoid 1232 and the main control board 4100, and the game ball T attached to the rear side of the accessory unit cover 1174 and received in the general winning opening 1151 downward. A general prize opening guide member 1179 for guiding, and a general prize opening sensor 1180 (see FIG. 126) attached to the general prize opening guide member 1179 for detecting the game ball T received in the general prize opening 1151. Equipped with.

The base plate 1160 of the winning opening unit 1150 has a receiving portion 1160a that projects forward from the upper left portion of the front view, is open at the top and the rear, and forms the first starting opening 1152, and the receiving portion 1160a. An attacker opening 1160b that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the lower side and extends to the left and right, and a later-described special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 is inserted from the rear side, and an upper part of the center portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A second starting opening 1160c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a second starting opening 1153 facing the rear side, and a second starting-opening opening 1160c that extends in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction to extend in a slit shape, which will be described later. The door slit 1160d through which the front side of the starting port door member 1214 of the starting port unit 1210 is allowed to pass, and the upper side of the door slit 1160d are arranged in the left and right in front of the starting port reflector 1169, and the second starting port is provided. The second starting mouth upper shelf light emitting decoration portion 1160e, which is light-emitted and decorated by the LED of the decoration substrate 1168, is provided.

Further, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth on the right side in a front view of the second starting mouth upper shelf light emitting decoration portion 1160e to form a character prize winning hole 1155 of the character prize unit 1220A of the character unit 1220, which will be described later. The upper part of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 are inserted so that the front parts thereof project from the rear side to the front, and the accessory winning hole reflector 1176 is provided above the accessory winning hole opening 1160f. The accessory winning opening illuminating decoration portion 1160g, which is arranged in the left and right at the front side and is illuminated by the LED of the accessory winning opening decoration substrate 1175, and the front and back penetrate below the accessory winning opening opening 1160f. A V winning opening opening 1160h into which a ball guiding member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220, which will be described later, is inserted so as to project from the rear side to the front, and rearward to the upper part of the right part in front view. A gutter part 1160i that guides the game ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 to the rear in a gutter shape that is extended and has an open upper part and transfers it to the general winning opening guide member 1179. And are equipped with.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front game area 1100, and the flat front plate portion 1161a is the front surface. It is shaped like a shallow box with the rear side open. The front flow path forming member 1161 is open to the upper right and the rear in the front view, and the receiving portion 1161b that guides the game ball T received from the upper side to the rear to form the general winning opening 1151 and the receiving portion 1161b. From the receiving part 1161b to the lower extension of the left side of the receiving part 1161b from the right side of the receiving part 1161b to the lower side of the receiving part 1161b. 1161c, the receiving part lower right standing wall part 1161d which extends downward from the left end of the receiving part lower shelf part 1161c to the upper part of the prize winning opening 1155, and the receiving part 1161b is separated from the receiving part 1161b to the left side in front by a distance larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T. A position lower than the receiving part lower shelf 1161c and above the character prize opening 1155 (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T from the character prize opening/closing member 1221 of the character prize opening unit 1220A described later). Position) and the receiving part left standing wall portion 1161e extending vertically from the lower end of the receiving part left standing wall portion 1161e to the right above the left end of the winning part winning hole 1155 along the upper side of the winning part winning hole 1155. And a prize winning upper ceiling wall portion 1161f extending to.

Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered to the left from the position in contact with the left end of the accessory winning opening 1155 (effect winning opening opening/closing member 1221) which is lower left than the left end of the accessory winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f. A short leftward winning part entrance portion 1161g, and a second starting opening area right upright wall portion 1161h extending vertically from the right end of the left left opening portion 1161g of the accessory winning part vertically below the second starting opening 1153. The second starting opening region lower shelf 1161i extends leftward from the lower end of the second starting opening region right upright wall portion 1161h to the left end of the front flow path forming member 1161 so that the left side is lowered.

Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated from the second starting opening region right standing wall portion 1161h to the left side by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and from the upper surface of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g. The second starting opening region lower shelf 1161i extends leftward to a position above the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the left side becomes lower from a position separated downward by a distance larger than the outer diameter of T. The second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j disposed immediately above the second starting opening 1153 and the right end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j hang downward so as to cover the right side of the second starting opening 1153. Second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k, guiding piece 1161l protruding leftward as it goes forward from the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k, and the outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. And a second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m that is slightly larger than the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and extends vertically from a position above the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j to a lower position.

The winning opening unit 1150 of the present embodiment includes a ball starting sensor 1164 attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163 and a ball detecting sensor 1208 attached to the attacker unit 1200, which will be described later. The first starting opening sensor 1190 for detecting the game ball T received in 1152 is formed. Further, a sphere detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second starting port guide member 1170 and a sphere detection sensor 1213 (to be described later) attached to the variable starting port unit 1210 are received by the second starting port 1153. A second starting port sensor 1191 for detecting the game ball T is formed.

Further, as will be described later in detail, the winning hole unit 1150 is provided in a winning hole sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T received in the winning hole 1154 of the attacker unit 1200, and a winning prize hole 1155 of the winning unit 1220. It is provided with a prize winning hole sensor 1224 for detecting the accepted game ball T, and a specific sensor 1239 for detecting the game ball T accepted by the V winning hole 1156 of the prize unit 1220.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 104 to 106, the attacker unit 1200 of the winning opening unit 1150 has a large winning opening 1154 that is open toward the front and extends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a large winning opening 1154. An under-attacker base 1201 that forms a lower portion, an over-attacker base 1202 that is attached to an upper side of the under-attacker base 1201 and that is attached to a base plate 1160 and that forms an upper part of the special winning opening 1154, an under-attacker base 1201 and an over-attacker It is attached between a special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 which is rotatably supported by a base 1202 about a shaft extending in the left-right direction and which opens and closes the special winning opening 1154, and an attacker lower base 1201 and an attacker upper base 1202. The attacker solenoid 1204 having the plunger 1204a that moves forward and backward depending on the gaming state, the link member 1205 that transmits the forward/backward movement of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 to open/close the special winning opening/closing member 1203, and the lower attacker The special winning opening sensor 1206 which is attached to the base 1201 and detects the game ball T received in the special winning opening 1154, and the game which is attached to the lower side of the under-attacker base 1201 and which is detected by the special winning opening sensor 1206 A guide member 1207 that guides the ball T backward is provided, and a ball detection sensor 1208 that is attached to the upper part of the attacker upper base 1202 and that detects the game ball T received in the first starting opening 1152.

The special winning opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 is a horizontally long rectangular shape which is 4 to 6 times as long as the diameter of the game ball T in the front view and is slightly longer in the vertical direction than the diameter of the game ball T. Is opened toward the front, and the opened opening can be opened and closed by a plate-shaped special winning opening opening/closing member 1203. In the special winning opening 1154, the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is rotatable around the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball T cannot be received. When the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state, the gaming ball T can be received, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

The under-attacker base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and has a vertically elongated box-shaped lower accommodation section 1201a that is open at the front and upper sides, and vertically penetrates the bottom wall of the lower accommodation section 1201a. A through hole 1201b through which the ball T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c which is formed below the through hole 1201b and into which a special winning opening sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and a lower front side of both left and right ends of the lower housing portion 1201a. A pair of bearing lower parts 1201d arranged, a solenoid supporting part 1201e formed on the right rear side of the lower housing part 1201a, and a U-shape formed on the front side of the solenoid supporting part 1201e and on the right side of the lower housing part 1201a. The shaft support portion 1201f is provided, and the passage hole 1201g is formed in the center of the left-right direction on the rear side of the lower housing portion 1201a and vertically penetrates so that the game ball T can pass therethrough.

The lower part 1201a of the accommodating part of the under-attacker base 1201 forms the lower half of the special winning opening 1154, and the bottom wall is inclined so as to be lower toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201d cooperates with a later-described bearing upper portion 1202b of the attacker upper base 1202 to rotatably support the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203. The pivot member 1201f can pivotally support the link member 1205 by inserting the rotating shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 from the upper side. The passing hole 1201g is received by the first starting port 1152 and the game ball T passing through the through hole 1202e of the attacker upper base 1202 passes through.

The attacker upper base 1202 of the attacker unit 1200 is arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged on the storage box upper 1202a in the shape of a horizontally long box whose front and lower sides are open, and the lower front surfaces on both left and right sides of the storage section 1202a. Formed on a pair of bearings 1202b, a shaft hole 1202c penetrating in the front and rear on the right side of the housing 1202a and into which the pivot shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted, and an upper rear side of the housing 1202a. It is provided with a sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from the upper side, and a through hole 1202e vertically penetrating the game ball T in the right portion of the sensor support portion 1202d. ..

The upper accommodation portion 1202a of the upper attacker base 1202 cooperates with the lower accommodation portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 to form a special winning opening 1154. The pair of upper bearing portions 1202b cooperate with the lower bearing portion 1201d of the attacker lower base 1201 to rotatably support the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a later-described rotating shaft 1205a of the link member 1205. The game ball T, which is received by the first starting port 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208, passes through the through hole 1202e.

The special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 is a flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from the lower left and right ends of the door portion 1203a, and the door portion 1203a. And an action pin 1203c projecting to the right from a position obliquely below and rearward of the shaft pin 1203b on the right end side in FIG.

The door portion 1203a of the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is formed in a size capable of closing the special winning opening 1154 formed by the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203b are rotatably supported by a pair of lower bearing portions 1201d and a pair of upper bearing portions 1202b of the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202, respectively. The action pin 1203c is inserted between a pair of operation pins 1205c of the link member 1205, which will be described later.

The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202 while being inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201e of the attacker lower base 1201 so that the plunger 1204a moves forward and backward from the right end side. .. The tip of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is formed in a disk shape. The attacker solenoid 1204 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and when it is not energized, the plunger 1204a is projected by the biasing force of the coil spring.

The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a rotating shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b protruding rearward from a position eccentric to the axis of the rotating shaft 1205a, and a rotating shaft 1205a. A pair of actuating pins 1205c protruding forward from a position eccentric with respect to the shaft center. The rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the shaft support 1201f of the attacker lower base 1201 and the shaft hole 1202c of the attacker upper base 1202. The engaging portion 1205b is formed with a notch into which the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The action pin 1203c of the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is inserted between the pair of operation pins 1205c.

In the link member 1205, the engagement portion 1205b mainly moves in the left-right direction in a state where the relationship between the engagement portion 1205b and the pair of operation pins 1205c is attached to the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202, The pair of actuating pins 1205c are arranged so as to move mainly in the vertical direction. When the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the protruding state to the retracted direction (left direction in front view), the link member 1205 rotates in the clockwise direction in front view.

The guide member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion, and is attached to a lower side of the through hole 1201b in the lower attacker base 1201.

In the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the plunger 1204a is projected rightward by the urging force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operation pin 1205c of the pair of operation pins 1205c is in contact with the operation pin 105c of the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 from above, and the flat door portion 1203a is in an upright state. The special winning opening 1154 is closed. That is, the game ball T cannot be received in the special winning opening 1154.

In the attacker unit 1200, when the attacker solenoid 1204 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 1204a moves to the left and enters a state in which the disk-shaped tip is removed. By the leftward movement of the plunger 1204a, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a revolves so as to move leftward, and the link member 1205 rotates. It rotates clockwise around the moving shaft 1205a in a front view.

When the link member 1205 rotates clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves so as to move upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c separates upward from the operating pin 1203c of the special winning opening/closing member 1203. The lower operation pin 1205c contacts the action pin 1203c from the lower side, and further moves the action pin 1203c upward. Then, the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 rotates about the shaft pin 1203b such that the upper end moves forward, and the flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the special winning opening 1154 is opened, and the game ball T into the special winning opening 1154 is ready to be received.

[2-2B. Variable starter unit]
The variable starting port unit 1210 of the winning port unit 1150 is provided with a second starting port 1153 that is open toward the front on the front right side of the front view, mainly as shown in FIGS. The second starting port 1153 is formed in a size such that only one game ball T can pass through. The variable starting port unit 1210 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 1211 whose front and upper parts are opened, and a box-shaped upper case 1212 which is attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and whose front part and lower part are opened. A ball detection sensor 1213 attached to the lower case 1211 for detecting the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153, a starting port door member 1214 slidably supported by the lower case 1211 back and forth, and a lower case. A starting opening solenoid 1215 provided with a plunger 1215a supported between 1211 and an upper case 1212 and moving forward and backward according to a game state, and forward and backward movement of a plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 are transmitted to move a starting opening door member 1214 back and forth. The link member 1216 that slides to the front and the slide detection sensor 1217 that detects the slide position of the starting opening door member 1214 are provided.

The lower case 1211 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is formed in a state of being inclined so as to be lower from the front side toward the rear side at the position of the right part of the upper surface, and a ball guiding portion 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T, A through hole 1211b which vertically penetrates at the rear end side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and through which the game ball T can pass, and a ball detecting sensor 1213 which is opened at the lower side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and is supported forwardly. Sensor support hole 1211c, a pair of slide grooves 1211d formed in the center of the left-right direction and facing each other and extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical support pin 1211e protruding upward from the left portion of the upper surface. , Are provided.

The upper case 1212 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 has a passage upper portion 1212a which is open at the front and lower portions at the front right side in the front view and in which the upper wall is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear. A second starting opening decoration is formed between a front end opening forming portion 1212b that forms a lower surface on the front end side on the left side in front view of the passage 1212a in the case 1212, and a base plate 1160 formed above the front end opening forming portion 1212b. A board rear pressing part 1212c for sandwiching the board 1168 and the starting opening reflector 1169, and a solenoid coating part 1212d formed on the rear side of the board rear pressing part 1212c and the front end opening forming part 1212b and covering the starting opening solenoid 1215 from above. Is equipped with.

The passage upper part 1212a of the upper case 1212 forms the second starting port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b in the lower case 1211. The passage upper portion 1212a is formed in a U-shape with the opening facing downward, and the right side extends downward longer than the left side in a front view. Further, the passage upper part 1212a can guide the game ball T backward by cooperating with the ball guiding portion 1211a.

The front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212 has a front end formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212a. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape in a front view that is 1/3 of the height of the left side of the passage upper part 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) to the left from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the passage upper part 1212a to the left. After extending diagonally to the height of the passage, it further extends to the left at the same angle as the upper portion of the passage 1212a at a large angle (about 45 degrees) with respect to the horizontal, and further extends horizontally to the left from there, and then the upper portion of the passage. 1212a is formed in a shape extending downward to an intermediate height between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side of 1212a.

In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape extending upward from the vicinity of the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a, and horizontally extending from the upper end to the right and then to the lower right. To the horizontal to extend from the lower end of the left side of the upper part 1212a of the passage to a height of about 1/3 of the height of the left side of the upper part 1212a, and from there to the lower right side near the lower end of the left side of the upper part 1212a of the passage. It extends long diagonally. The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the like of the starting opening door member 1214 are arranged below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

The starter door member 1214 of the variable starter unit 1210 has a flat plate-shaped first guide portion 1214a extending obliquely (at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal) toward the lower right in a front view, and a first guide portion. The second guide portion 1214b and the second guide portion 1214b having a flat plate shape extending obliquely from the right end of 1214a to the lower right in the front view at a smaller angle (about 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a. A plate-shaped third guide portion 1214c, which is provided at a position lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b on the right side of the right end and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear, and a front end of the third guide portion 1214c. From the first guide portion 1214b to the same height as the right end of the second guide portion 1214b, and the flat wall portion 1214e extending from the right end of the third guide portion 1214c to the upper side of the front wall portion 1214d. And are equipped with.

The starting opening door member 1214 includes a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guide portion 1214b, a flat plate-shaped slider portion 1214g extending rearward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider. A columnar connecting pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g and a detection portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g are provided.

The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the starting opening door member 1214 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width of the first guide portion 1214a and the like in the front-rear direction is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Further, the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 (the lengths from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) are formed to be about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T. Has been done. Furthermore, the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed to be about 2/3 times the outer diameter of the game ball T. The first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are arranged below the front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212. The third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e are arranged between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212.

Left and right ends of the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 are inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211, respectively. Accordingly, the starting opening door member 1214 is supported by the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable forward and backward. The connecting pin 1214h is slidably inserted into a linking hole 1216e, which will be described later, of the link member 1216 to be linked to the link member 1216, and the forward/backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is transmitted. The detection unit 1214i can be detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

The starting opening solenoid 1215 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid coating 1212d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward from the left end side. The plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 has a disk-shaped tip with a large diameter. Further, the starting opening solenoid 1215 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and when it is not energized, the plunger 1215a is projected (extended) by the biasing force of the coil spring.

The link member 1216 of the variable starting port unit 1210 includes a cylindrical main body 1216a rotatably fitted to the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 from the upper side, and a first piece 1216b extending outward from the main body 1216a. And an engaging portion 1216c protruding upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and engageable with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215, and a direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body 1216a. And a second piece 1216d that extends at a right angle longer than the first piece 1216b, and a second piece 1216d that extends vertically through the tip of the second piece 1216d and extends in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extends. The connection pin 1214h of the cage door member 1214 is provided with a long hole-shaped connection hole 1216e into which the connection pin 1214h is slidably inserted from below.

The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends from the upper end of the main body 1216a in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d extends in a clockwise direction from the lower side of the first piece 1216b in the body portion 1216a in a clockwise direction with respect to the first piece 1216b in a plan view. The second piece 1216d is formed to have a length such that the tip is located near the center of the lower case 1211 in the left-right direction in a state where the main body 1216a is fitted into the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211.

As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, in this variable starting port unit 1210, the slider section 1214g of the starting port door member 1214 is positioned below the first guide section 1214a, the second guide section 1214b, and the third guide section 1214c. In addition, the starting opening solenoid 1215 is arranged in the lateral direction on the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b above the slider portion 1214g, and the starting opening solenoid 1215 is On the lower side, the link member 1216 is used to transmit the forward/backward movement of the plunger 1215a to the starting opening door member 1214. Thereby, the distance (size) in the front-rear direction of the variable starting port unit 1210 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable starting port unit 1210 can be relatively widened.

In the variable starting port unit 1210 of the present embodiment, in a normal state (when the starting port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 is projected leftward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the tip of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and the first piece 1216b. The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending in the clockwise direction with respect to is located rearward of the center of the support pin 1211e. The front end of the starting opening door member 1214 provided with the connecting pin 1214h inserted into the connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 substantially coincides with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the starting opening door member 1214 is in a state of being retracted (retracted) from within the game area 1100 (a state of an unacceptable position). In this normal state, the detection unit 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

In the variable starting opening unit 1210, when the starting opening solenoid 1215 is energized in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 of the center accessory 1130, the plunger 1215a is retracted to the right. (See FIG. 113). When the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 moves to the right and sinks, the entire link member 1216 is planarly viewed centering on the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 by the engaging portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. Rotate in the clockwise direction.

By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d is rotated so as to move relatively forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connecting pin 1214h of the starting port door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting port door member 1214 slides forward as a whole. As a result, the front end of the starting port door member 1214 projects forward of the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the starting port door member 1214. , And the standing wall portion 1214e are in a state (a state of a receivable position) that has appeared in the game area 1100. In the state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to appear in the game area 1100, the detection unit 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 appears in the game area 1100, the first guide portion 1214a rolls to the right due to the inclination, and the second guide portion 1214b. Sent up. Then, the game ball T sent to the second guide portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guide portion 1214b, and to the third guide portion 1214c arranged on the right side of the second guide portion 1214b. Is sent.

Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the rear end is low, the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c has the direction in which it rolls in the third guide portion 1214c changed to the rear, From the rear end of the third guide portion 1214c, it is sent between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the upper passage 1212a of the upper case 1212 at the rear. That is, the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153. At this time, in the starting opening door member 1214, since the right end of the third guide portion 1214c is provided with the standing wall portion 1214e that is approximately half the height of the outer diameter of the game ball T, from the second guide portion 1214b. The game ball T that has rolled from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c contacts the standing wall portion 1214e, and is prevented from rolling to the right of the third guide portion 1214c. Moreover, the game ball T that has rolled from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c can also be rolled rearward by the guide piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161.

The game ball T discharged backward from the third guide portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 arranged below the third guide portion 1214c and is guided by the ball guide portion 1211a. Of the ball guiding portion 1211a, the ball guiding portion 1211a opens to the passage hole 1211b opened at the rear end of the ball guiding portion 1211a.

Since the second starting port 1153 having such a configuration is always open toward the front in the game area 1100 regardless of the game situation, is it apparently possible to receive the game ball T? It seems. However, since the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged on the upper side of the second starting opening 1153, even if the game ball T flows down from the upper side, it is arranged on the lower side of the second starting opening 1153. Unless it is jumped up to the height of the second starting port 1153 when it falls to the second starting port region lower shelf 1161i, it is not received by the second starting port 1153. That is, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment is arranged in the game area 1100 in an area where the game ball T is extremely difficult to flow down.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 projects forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 with respect to the second starting opening 1153. By doing so, the game ball T can be accepted.

That is, in the normal state (the starting opening solenoid 1215 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 123A, the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 does not project forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, It is in the position where it was destroyed. Then, in such a state of being sunk, even if the game ball T flows down between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, this gaming ball T is started. The upper surface of the mouth door member 1214 (such as the first guide portion 1214a) cannot be rolled, and it will flow down onto the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i arranged on the lower side as it is.

On the other hand, when a normal hit is obtained in the normal lottery in which the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134, the start end solenoid 1215 is energized and the front end of the start mouth door member 1214 is a base plate. It will project forward from the front surface of 1160.

That is, in the state where the front end of the starting port door member 1214 projects forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 (the state in which the second starting port 1153 can be received), the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting port region left. When the game ball T flows down between the standing wall portion 1161m, the game ball T comes into contact with the upper surface (bottom surface) of the first guide portion 1214a (starting opening door member 1214). In this respect, since the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side becomes higher, this inclination guides the game ball T to the right side where the second starting port 1153 is provided. ..

Then, the game ball T guided to the right by the first guide portion 1214a further rolls on the right second guide portion 1214b. Since the bottom surface of the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the rolling speed of the game ball T increases slowly, but thus the second guide portion 1214b moves to the right. The rolling game ball T will be further rolled to the third guide portion 1214c on the right side thereof.

On the other hand, the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is lowered toward the rear side where the opening serving as the second starting port 1153 is provided. Further, in front of the third guide portion 1214c, a front wall portion 1214d for restricting the game ball T on the third guide portion 1214c from spilling from the front is formed, and at the right of the third guide portion 1214c. On one side, a standing wall portion 1214e is formed which abuts on and regulates the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b so as not to flow down to the right as it is.

Therefore, when the game ball T from the first guide part 1214a and the second guide part 1214b is supplied to the third guide part 1214c, the game ball T comes into contact with the front wall part 1214d and the standing wall part 1214e. While the movement is restricted, the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the third guide portion 1214c can be received in the opening portion as the second starting opening 1153.

With such a configuration, when the starting opening solenoid 1215 is energized, the starting opening door member 1214 moves forward, passes through the second starting opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160, and passes through the first guide portion. 1214a, the 2nd guide part 1214b, the 3rd guide part 1214c, the front wall part 1214d, and the standing wall part 1214e project ahead rather than the front surface of the base plate 1160. In this state, when the game ball T is discharged to the left from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it comes into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m and then the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214. The flow direction is directed to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a while contacting the portion 1214a. Then, the game ball T rolls from the first guide portion 1214a to the third guide portion 1214c through the second guide portion 1214b, the inclination of the third guide portion 1214c and the guide piece 1161l of the front flow passage forming member 1161. Thus, the rolling direction is directed rearward and is received by the second starting port 1153 opening rearward.

When the game ball T is received by the second starting opening 1153 and detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191, the main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 by the detection signal, and payout. The control board 4110 controls the prize ball device 740 to dispense the number of game balls T (for example, one) according to the received payout command to the dish unit 300.

On the other hand, when the power supply to the starting opening solenoid 1215 is completed, the plunger 1215a that has been depressed due to the urging force of the coil spring provided in the starting opening solenoid 1215 projects, and the starting opening door member 1214 retracts via the link member 1216. To do. When the starting door member 1214 is retracted in this manner, the protruding amounts of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decrease (starting door The gap between the front end of the member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 102) of the front flow path forming member 1161 gradually increases). That is, in this case, when there is a game ball T rolling on the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b in the starting opening door member 1214, a gap between the game ball T and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a is generated. At the stage where the diameter of the game ball T is expanded to the diameter of the game ball T or more, the game ball T will spill out from the gap. However, at this time, when there is a game ball T that has reached the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c before the gap expands to the diameter of the game ball T or more, the game ball T has a front wall portion 1214d and a standing wall. Upon receiving the guidance from the portion 1214e, the third guiding portion 1214c and the third guiding portion 1214c are both received in the opening serving as the second starting port 1153.

As described above, the second starting port 1153 according to the present embodiment is provided as a remote island type winning port provided at a position apart from the downflow route through which the game ball T can flow down in the game area 1100. There is. Further, it is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and of the sunk position (see FIG. 122(a)) and the appearance position (see FIG. 122(b)). When it is in the appearance position, it serves as a bridge passage connecting the downflow route and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port), and the game ball T on the downflow route is in a direction different from the depth direction (right direction). ), the starting opening door member 1214 (tonbolo type movable member) provided so as to roll to the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island type winning opening).

Therefore, as the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the game ball T until it is received by the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island type winning opening). It is possible to strictly distinguish between an operation that allows bridging of the sphere T and an operation that does not allow bridging, and use them properly. Due to this, unlike the conventional case where the structure that spills the game ball on the upper surface of the operated movable piece by inertia is adopted, it is more likely that a prize will rarely occur despite the unacceptable operation. It will be possible to avoid it without fail.

That is, only a bridging time shorter than the prize-winning threshold time required for the gaming ball T on the flow-down path to reach the third guiding portion 1214c after starting rolling in the first guiding portion 1214a. If the control for energizing the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the starting opening door member 1214 does not project, the second starting opening 1153 will not operate even if the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted (unallowable operation, disadvantageous game mode). That is, in this case, even if the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting door member 1214) by the movement to the appearance position of the starting opening door member 1214, this gaming ball T Is a front surface of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting opening door member 1214) that recedes before reaching the third guide portion 1214c and a rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a in the front flow path forming member 1161. It will spill from the gap between.

On the other hand, a bridging time longer than the prize-winning threshold time required for the gaming ball T on the downflow route to reach the third guiding portion 1214c after starting rolling in the first guiding portion 1214a. If the control relating to the energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the starting opening door member 1214 is projected over the entire range, the second starting opening 1153 will be displayed when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to allow the game ball T to be accepted (allowable operation, advantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting door member 1214) has the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting door member 1214). It becomes possible to reach the third guide portion 1214c earlier than when the vehicle retreats. Then, the game ball that has arrived at the third guide portion 1214c in this way is received by the opening as the second starting port 1153 due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c. At this time, even if the backward movement of the third guide portion 1214c (starting opening door member 1214) is started, the inertial force acting on the game ball T due to the contact with the front wall portion 1214d is received. It can be received by the second starting port 1153 without spilling from the third guide portion 1214c.

Only by controlling the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, a more reliable winning of the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated, and the starting opening door member. More reliable non-winning of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 when 1212 is operated can be selectively used according to the situation of the game. As a result, it is possible to realize a bold game design on the assumption that no prize is won when the starting door member 1214 is located at the appearance position for only a short bridging time.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, the first guide portion 1214a when the starting opening door member 1214 of the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) retracts. The portion in which the second guide portion 1214b and the second guide portion 1214b are stored is formed only as a small hole that allows these to be stored. That is, in this case, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the like is gradually reduced by retracting the starting opening door member 1214, so that the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are not removed. The game ball T rolling on the upper surface is naturally attracted to the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game plate 4), and the game ball T thus attracted is on the base plate 1160 (game plate 4). Since it rolls to the right while being pressed against the front wall surface (or while being pressed more strongly than when stationary at the appearance position), contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) The braking force can be applied to the speed of rolling to the right by a frictional force equal to or higher than a predetermined value (or a stronger frictional force than when stationary at the appearance position).

In this way, when the starting door member 1214 starts to move backward and the winning of the second starting opening 1153 is changed to an unfavorable situation, the base plate 1160 (game board 4) is not in contact with the front wall surface. Since the system that automatically brakes the speed toward the second starting port 1153 by the frictional force according to the contact is constructed, the starting port door member 1214 moves backward (from the appearance position to the retracted position). After the (displacement) is started, it becomes possible to suppress the number of game balls that reach the second starting opening 1153, whereby a non-win prize occurs when performing an operation that does not allow the game ball T to be bridged. Certainty will increase.

Since the starting opening door member 1214 according to this embodiment has a structure that moves forward and backward, when viewed from the player (front) side, whether the starting opening door member 1214 is moving forward or backward. It's hard to tell what is happening. Therefore, by actually flowing down the game ball T between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, the starting opening door depends on whether or not it abuts the starting opening door member 1214. It is necessary to recognize whether the member 1214 moves back and forth, and the player should make a right hit so that the game ball T flows between the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting mouth area left standing wall portion 1161m. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the game ball T, and it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the movement of the game ball T and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is separated from the lower surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is left. The game ball T which is rolled toward the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and comes into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m from the left end thereof, and then comes into contact with the first guiding portion 1214a and is guided to the right. The movement makes a sudden U-turn, and can strongly attract the player's interest (see FIG. 122(b) and FIG. 123(b)).

Further, in the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, etc., the game ball T is open forward with a size that allows only one game ball T to be received. Immediately above the second starting port 1153, the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161 is arranged. The second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j extends to the left and right so that the left end portion side is low with a length about three times the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the rising right end portion side is the second starting opening. It is located directly above 1153. That is, the left end portion side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extends to the left of the second starting opening 1153. Further, the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is such that the difference in height between the right end portion side and the left end portion side is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

A second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m that extends vertically with a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T is arranged on the left outer side from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. The second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m is positioned such that the upper end is located above the left end of the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance that is about 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the lower end is the second starting opening. It extends vertically so as to be located above the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 at a distance substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T below the upper left end of the upper shelf portion 1161j.

The starting opening door member 1214 is on the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, and is spaced apart from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j such that only one game ball T can flow, the second starting opening. It is arranged below the upper shelf portion 1161j. The length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 to the right end of the third guide portion 1214c (standing wall portion 1214e) is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

[2-2C. Regarding the special flow-down passage leading to the accessory winning hole 1155 formed by the base plate 1160 and the front flow passage forming member 1161]
As described above, the front flow path forming member 1161 projects from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front game area 1100 as shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, and the flat front plate portion 1161a. By being provided as a shallow box-like shape whose front side is open, a special flow-down passage of the game ball T leading to the accessory winning hole 1155 is formed between the base plate 1160 and the rear side.

Here, as shown in FIG. 99, the special downflow passage has two passages X and Y formed so as to sandwich the general winning opening 1151, and the game ball T hit to the right has these passages X. , Y, a specific rolling area that can be received in the prize winning opening 1155 (here, an area directly above the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 when closed (upper surface or the like)). ) Is formed to reach.

However, in the passage X on the left side of the general winning opening 1151, the game ball T flowing down the passage X is guided slightly to the right by the thick portion of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e. Is formed with. The passage Y on the right side of the general winning opening 1151 also guides the game ball T flowing down the passage Y downward to the left side by the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c, but the receiving portion 1161b. It is formed with a structure that stops the movement in the left direction by abutting on a portion formed so as to extend vertically downward.

According to such a configuration, the game ball T hit to the right is in a closed state after at least having a speed in the left direction (or having a slight speed in the left direction). It is possible to supply to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a).

In this respect, the accessory winning hole opening/closing member 1221 according to the present embodiment is provided as a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side and the back side are respectively lowered, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the special downflow passage, the game ball T passing through either of the passages X and Y does not have a leftward speed (or has only a slight leftward speed). It is provided so as to be supplied to the right side portion (the most upstream portion of the specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a).

According to such a configuration, irrespective of the flow-down speed of the game ball T, the strength at the time of launching, etc., any game ball T that reaches the right side of the prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is left. From the state in which the speed in the direction (initial speed) is substantially "0", the rolling in the left direction (more accurately, the left back direction) starts slowly due to its own weight. Therefore, the game ball T stays on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) for a long time, and in addition, the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 is removed by the variation in the initial speed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause variations in the speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the (door portion 1221a).

Then, in the special flow-down passage according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the leftward rolling on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) due to its own weight. The game ball T that starts slowly has a structure (the base plate side restricting portion 1160k, the front surface side restricting portion 1161k) that restricts the rolling speed so that the rolling speed does not exceed a predetermined speed value due to the inclination of the upper surface. I have it.

That is, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in the specific rolling region) ) Is L (for example, 6 cm), and the time of the firing interval when the game balls T are continuously driven into the game area 1100 by the ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds). ), rolling in the passage so that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game ball T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less than "L/2T". It is provided as a structure that interacts with the game ball T.

According to such a configuration, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, at least two (2,3) or more (2,3) are provided on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. It becomes possible to make a game ball exist.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 100, and FIG. 125, the special downflow passage has the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) left. Front side flow path for the game ball T, which is formed as three protrusions that engage with the game ball T rolling in the direction from the base plate 1160 side and reduce the speed thereof. The front side regulating portion 1161k formed as two protrusions that are engaged with each other from the forming member 1161 side and reduce the speed thereof.

Here, the base plate side restriction portion 1160k (three projections on the base plate 1160 side) and the front surface side restriction portion 1161k (two projections on the front surface flow path forming member 1161 side) are as shown in FIG. Further, they are provided so as to face each other with the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) interposed therebetween in a staggered relationship. As described above, the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is inclined so that the left side and the back side are lower.

According to such a configuration, for example, the game ball T1 on which the rolling of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) slowly started in the left back direction is first on the base plate 1160 side. By coming into contact with the protrusion on the right side of the three protrusions (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k), the speed in the left direction is reduced and the velocity is guided toward the front side. That is, the inclination toward the back side of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is so gentle that the game ball T can be guided to the front side by the base plate side regulating portion 1160k.

In this way, the game ball T1 guided to the front side by the base plate side regulation portion 1160k is combined with the leftward inclination of the character prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) itself, and the character prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion. On the upper surface of 1221a), rolling in the front left direction is slowly started. As a result, by contacting the protrusion on the right side of the two protrusions on the front flow path forming member 1161 side (the front side regulation portion 1161k), the speed in the left direction is reduced again and the depth is increased. You will be guided to the side.

That is, according to the base plate side regulating portion 1160k (three protrusions on the base plate 1160 side) and the front side regulating portion 1161k (two protrusions on the front flow path forming member 1161 side) according to this embodiment. , The game ball T1 on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is zigzag rolled to the left while decelerating on the base plate 1160 side and the front flow path forming member 1161 side each time. It becomes possible to manage so that the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not exceed "L/2T". ..

As a result, while the game ball T1 is still rolling on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the game is launched rightward (after 0.6 seconds). The ball T2 (further, a game ball that is fired next (after 1.2 seconds)) reaches the right side of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a). Therefore, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two (2,3) game balls may be present on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) in the closed state. become able to.

Further, since it becomes possible to play such that at least two or more game balls T are habitually present in the specific rolling area in this manner, a plurality of games are played each time the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 is opened. An excellent winning performance such that the ball T can win is realized, and thus, the winning situation at the accessory winning hole 1155 can be given a sense of speed.

Further, as will be described later, the accessory winning hole opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of game balls T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) substantially at the same time. It slides in a direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (leftward direction) of the game balls T so as to fall down to the accessory winning hole 1155. As a result, every time the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is opened, as for the game balls T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221, regardless of the number thereof, the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. Since it is possible to enter all of them in a lump sum, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the winning situation at the character prize winning slot 1155, and also to obtain (payout) a large amount of prizes at one time. You can expect it.

Although illustration is omitted, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, a thick portion is formed in a portion which is a confluence point of the passages X and Y on the front flow passage forming member 1161 side. The game ball T flowing down one of the passages X and Y by the thick part is guided to the back side, and the speed of the game ball T itself is decelerated, and the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door part The movement of the game ball T on the upper surface of 1221a) is further stabilized. Thereby, in addition to the variation in the average speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) being less likely to occur, the right side of the winning prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). The game ball T1 that has reached the portion can be more reliably brought into contact with the protrusion on the right side (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k) of the three protrusions on the base plate 1160 side.

According to such a special flow-down passage, when the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is in the closed state, the game balls T sequentially reached by the firing by the hitting ball launching device 650 are the winning a prize opening/closing member. It is possible to increase the number of game balls T that are kept waiting in the prize winning opening 1155 by staying on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the 1221 (door portion 1221a) over time. Like

In the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the game ball T that first reaches the specific rolling area is the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). ) Is finished to roll to the left, it is provided so that the two game balls have reached a specific rolling area. Therefore, the number of game balls T waiting to win the prize winning hole 1155 is increased to a maximum of three with the passage of time.

By the way, in the game ball T (the game ball T on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221) which is in the state of waiting for winning in the character prize opening 1155, the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is opened. When winning, the prize winning opening 1155 is spilled from the upper surface of the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221.

With such a configuration, as long as the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 operates to the open state, even if the operating time is extremely short, It becomes possible to enter the inside of the accessory winning port 1155. Moreover, since the game ball T that has already been fired (the game ball T that is in the prize-waiting state) will automatically enter the internal area of the character prize port 1155, the character prize hole It becomes possible to more accurately control the entry timing of the game ball T into the internal area of 1155. In other words, it is possible not only to eliminate the possibility of non-prize to the prize winning slot 1155 by opening control while there are game balls waiting for winning, but also to accurately control the winning period. Like

[2-2D. Schematic configuration of the accessory unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the winning opening unit 1150 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. This accessory unit 1220 is provided with an accessory prize opening 1155 through which the game ball T can be accepted in accordance with a special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball T in the first starting opening 1152 and the second starting opening 1153. The prize winning hole unit 1220A and the game ball T received in the prize winning hole 1155 of the prize winning hole unit 1220A are provided so as to be able to flow down in the internal area, and the game balls T can be accepted by sorting. V winning opening unit 1220B having a V winning opening 1156.

[2-2D1. Accessory winning unit]
The character prize opening unit 1220A of the character unit 1220 supports the character prize opening/closing member 1221 for opening/closing the character prize opening 1155 and the character prize opening/closing member 1221 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction and winning the character prize. The upper housing 1222 which divides the left and right ends of the mouth 1155, the lower housing 1223 which is attached to the lower side of the upper housing 1222 and receives the game ball T received in the prize winning opening 1155, and is attached to the lower housing 1223 The prize winning hole sensor 1224 that detects the game ball T received in the prize winning hole 1155 and the plunger 1225a that is supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and moves back and forth according to the gaming state are provided. The prize winning solenoid 1225, the link member 1226 for transmitting the advance/retreat of the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 and sliding the prize winning opening/closing member 1221, and the prize winning opening by detecting the movement of the link member 1226. An open/close detection sensor 1227 for detecting the opening/closing of 1155.

The character prize opening/closing member 1221 of the character prize opening unit 1220A has a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a that extends in the left-right direction with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is inclined so that the left side in front view becomes lower, and the door portion. An extension piece 1221b extending rearward from a rear end of the center of the left and right direction of 1221a and a connecting hole 1221c vertically penetrating near the front end of the extension piece 1221b and extending leftward and rightward are provided. ..

The upper housing 1222 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is a box-shaped upper housing main body 1222a on which the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 is placed on the upper surface and the lower side is open, and the front end from the left and right ends at the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a. And a pair of flat plate-shaped partitioning pieces 1222b protruding in the vertical and front-rear directions, and the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 formed at the left and right ends of the upper front portion of the upper housing body 1222a. A pair of groove-shaped first support portions 1222c that slidably support the upper housing body 1222a between the pair of first support portions 1222c and an opening portion 1222d that extends back and forth. The upper housing body 1222a includes a pair of groove-shaped second support portions 1222e formed on the rear portion of the upper surface thereof and slidably supporting the left and right ends of the extension piece 1221b of the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b are aligned.

The lower housing 1223 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A has a box shape with an open upper side, extends leftward and rightward in the same length as the interval between the pair of partition pieces 1222b in front of the upper housing body 1222a of the upper housing 1222, and has a bottom surface. A ball receiving portion 1223a which becomes lower toward the left and lower toward the rear near the left end, a cutout portion 1223b formed in the rear portion of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a through which the game ball T can pass, and a cutout portion 1223b. A sensor support portion 1223c, which is formed in the rear side and the lower side and has an open upper side, into which the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 is fitted, and a bottom wall of the sensor support portion 1223c vertically penetrates the accessory. An outlet 1223d through which a game ball detected by the prize hole sensor 1224 can pass, and a character prize solenoid 1225 is formed in a box shape formed on the right rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a and having an open upper side. A solenoid accommodating portion 1223e and a link accommodating portion 1223f that is formed on the left side of the solenoid accommodating portion 1223e (on the rear side in the left-right direction of the ball receiving portion 1223a) and rotatably accommodates the link member 1226 are provided. ..

The winning prize winning solenoid 1225 of the winning prize unit 1220A is housed and supported in the solenoid housing portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a moves forward and backward from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 has a disk-shaped tip with a large diameter. The prize winning solenoid 1225 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1225a is projected (extended) by the biasing force of the coil spring.

The link member 1226 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A is rotatably supported by the bottom of the link housing portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends left and right, and the upper housing 1222 extends from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. The strip-shaped rod portion 1226b that extends to a position above the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a through the opening portion 1222d, and a columnar shape that extends left and right at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b. A connecting portion 1226c that is inserted into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening/closing member 1221 from the lower side and a tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 that protrudes to the right at a position lower than the vertical center of the rod portion 1226b. And a detection piece 1226e extending rearward from the position of the rod portion 1226b between the engagement portion 1226d and the rotating shaft portion 1226a and detected by the open/close detection sensor 1227. ..

In the accessory winning opening unit 1220A of the present embodiment, in a normal state (when not energized), the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 is projected forward by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the tip of the plunger 1225a. By the engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 that is engaged with the rod member 1226, the rod portion 1226b of the link member 1226 rises substantially vertically from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. In this state, the accessory winning hole opening/closing member 1221 having the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pressed forward by the connecting portion 1226c via the connecting hole 1221c. As a result, the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 is slid forward.

As a result, the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 projects further forward than the front end of the upper housing body 1222a in the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door portion 1221a is substantially the same as the front end of the partition 1222b of the upper housing 1222. It is in the position. Further, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the upper housing 1222 which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Therefore, the prize winning opening 1155 that opens upward is in a state of being closed by the door portion 1221a of the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221, and the game ball T cannot be received (FIG. 124(b). ), etc.)). In this state, the game ball T flowing down onto the door portion 1221a rolls leftward and is discharged leftward from the left end of the door portion 1221a according to the door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side becomes lower. It In a state where the accessory winning opening 1155 is closed by the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is detected by the opening/closing detection sensor 1227.

When the accessory winning opening unit 1220A is energized to the accessory winning solenoid 1225 in accordance with the special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball T in the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153, the plunger 1225a is activated. Move to the back so as to be absorbed. When the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled so as to move rearward. As a result, the link member 1226 rotates about the rotation shaft portion 1226a in the direction in which the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves rearward. Since the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves rearward, the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 slides rearward through the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c is inserted. ..

At this time, the engaging portion 1226d of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the winning prize solenoid 1225 has the length (height) of the rod portion 1226b extending from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. Since the rotation shaft portion 1226a is arranged more than the center, the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves largely backward with respect to the movement amount of the plunger 1225a backward. Therefore, the front end of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear ends of the pair of partition pieces 1222b), and the winning prize opening 1155 is formed. The game ball T is opened upward and is ready to receive the game ball T (see FIG. 124(a)). When the accessory winning port 1155 is opened by the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the opening/closing detection sensor 1227.

When the game ball T is received by the character prize opening 1155 while the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is retracted and the character prize opening 1155 is opened and ready to be received, the game ball T is moved upward. It flows between the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and flows down onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223, and rolls leftward on the ball receiving portion 1223a due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. Then, the ball is received from the cutout portion 1223b on the left rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a to the rear side, detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 supported on the lower side behind the cutout portion 1223b, and then the lower housing. It is discharged from a discharge port 1223d of 1223 to a ball entrance 1238d of a ball guide member 1238 of the V winning hole unit 1220B below, which will be described later.

However, as will be described later, in the character prize opening unit 1220A according to the present embodiment, when the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is changed from the closed state to the open state, the prize winning hole 1155 is won. The game ball T that has entered the internal area is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 than the global entry time required for all the game balls T in the waiting state to enter the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155. Is formed with an internal passage that takes a longer time to reach the desired position. In this way, the detection location where the game ball T that has entered the internal area is provided for the determination of the closing of the winning a prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) (the upper limit value determination for the number of game balls T that can be won). Before all the game balls T that are in the prize-waiting state are entered, the plurality of game balls T that are in the prize-waiting state in the prize winning slot 1155 are habitually added. It becomes possible to actively generate overflow winnings for the upper limit value of the game ball T that can be won, in combination with the above-mentioned configuration that is dynamically created, and dynamic winning performance and award winning performance exceeding the set value. Will be able to be realized.

[2-2D2. V winning mouth unit]
The V winning opening unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the accessory winning unit 1220A and has a V winning opening 1156 and a unit front base 1230 and a unit front base 1230. The unit rear base 1231 attached to the rear side, the V winning solenoid 1232 having the plunger 1232a that is sandwiched between the unit front base 1230 and the unit rear base 1231 and moves back and forth according to the gaming state, and the unit rear base 1231 A drive gear member 1233 that is rotatably supported on the rear side by a unit front base 1230 and that is rotated by advancing and retracting a plunger 1232a of a V prize solenoid 1232, a driven gear member 1234 that meshes with the drive gear member 1233, and a driven gear member 1234. A shaft member 1235 having a rear end attached to the center of the shaft, rotatably supported by the unit front base 1230, and a front end protruding forward from the unit front base 1230.

Further, the V winning opening unit 1220B is arranged on the front surface of the unit front base 1230 and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and has a receiving portion 1236a on the peripheral surface capable of receiving only one game ball T. A cylindrical rotary body 1236, a disk-shaped rotary body front plate 1237 attached to the front surface of the rotary body 1236, and a front surface of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer circumference of the rotary body 1236 are attached to the role winning prize. A ball guiding member 1238 that guides the game ball T discharged from the outlet 1223d of the mouth unit 1220A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guides the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning opening 1156, is provided. ..

Further, the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a pair of specific sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156, and the rear side of the unit front base 1230. The V loss sensor 1240 that is attached and detects the gaming ball T that is not received by the V winning hole 1156 after being received by the accessory winning hole 1155, and the rotating body 1236 that is mounted on the rear side of the unit rear base 1231 The rotation detection sensor 1241 for detecting the rotation position of the.

The unit front base 1230 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is a flat surface extending vertically and horizontally, and a front surface portion 1230a in which the V winning opening 1156 penetrates forward and backward on the right side in front of the center with respect to the center, and the vicinity of the center of the front surface portion 1230a. And a bearing hole 1230b penetrating in the front-rear direction for rotatably supporting the shaft member 1235, and a loss hole 1230c penetrating in the front-rear direction above the bearing hole 1230b and through which the game ball T can pass. ..

In addition, the unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a and guides the game ball T received at the V winning opening 1156i downward to open the rear side of the first discharge path 1230d and the front surface portion 1230a. A second discharge path 1230e that is formed on the rear surface and guides the game ball T that has passed through the loss hole 1230c downward to open the rear side, and a rear surface of the front portion 1230a that is formed above the first discharge path 1230d. And a solenoid housing portion 1230f in which the V prize solenoid 1232 is housed. A pair of specific sensors 1239 is attached in the first discharge path 1230d. Further, the V-miss sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge path 1230e. The open rear sides of the first discharge passage 1230d, the second discharge passage 1230e, and the solenoid housing portion 1230f are closed by the unit rear base 1231.

The V winning solenoid 1232 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is housed in the solenoid housing portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 so that the plunger 1232a moves forward and backward from the lower end side. The plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 has a disk-shaped tip with a large diameter. Further, the V winning solenoid 1232 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) that biases the plunger 1232a in a protruding direction, and the coil spring keeps the plunger 1232a protruding downward when de-energized.

The drive gear member 1233 of the V winning opening unit 1220B has a shaft portion 1233a that extends in the front-rear direction and is rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a plate-shaped member that extends in the axis-perpendicular direction from the shaft portion 1233a. The extension piece 1233b, the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and the front portion of the extension piece 1233b protruding forward from the V winning prize. An engaging portion 1233d that engages with the tip of the plunger 1232a of the solenoid 1232 is provided.

The driven gear member 1234 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is driven by a driven gear 1234a that meshes with the drive gear of the drive gear member 1233. , A detection piece 1234b extending from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a in a direction perpendicular to the axis. The pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a extending in the arc shape in the driven gear member 1234 is formed to be about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the driving gear 1233c extending in the arc shape in the driving gear member 1233. There is.

The rotating body 1236 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed in a state in which a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T is opened to the front and the outer periphery. In the receiving portion 1236a of the rotator 1236, two sides (two sides spaced apart in the circumferential direction) extending from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side in a front view extend in a direction away from each other toward the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is opened upward, the left side of the front view with respect to the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom side of the receiving portion 1236a. The sides extend in parallel, while the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer peripheral side (see FIG. 120(a)). The radius of this rotating body 1236 is formed to be about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed so that the outer diameter to the bottom is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the game ball T (see FIG. 124(a)). Further, in the receiving portion 1236a, the rear wall is notched from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side, and is formed lower than the two sides that are separated in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a includes an inclined portion 1236b on the front surface side (inside) of the rear wall, which is inclined obliquely toward the rear as it goes upward (away from the rotation axis), By contacting the game ball T flowing down from above to the inclined portion 1236b, the game ball T is guided to the front to be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a, and at the time of receiving the game ball T, the receiving portion 1236a. The impact that acts on the bottom of the can be reduced. The open front end side of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. Thereby, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can move the game ball T in and out only from the outer side in the radial direction of the rotating body 1236.

The ball guide member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed by cutting a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and an upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a, and an upper opening through which the game ball T can pass. 1238b and a right side opening 1238c through which a game ball can pass, which is formed by cutting out a right side in front view of the peripheral wall portion 1238a (a position at an angle of 90 degrees clockwise in a front view with respect to the upper opening 1238b). , A ball inlet 1238d that is located above the peripheral wall portion 1238a, is located directly below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 of the accessory winning port unit 1220A, and opens upward, and from the ball inlet 1238d to the upper outlet 1238b. The game ball T is lowered and bent in a crank shape so that the game ball T can flow, and the game ball T is lowered from the right opening 1238c toward the V winning opening 1156 at the lower right of the front view. And a right guiding portion 1238f that can be distributed.

The ball guide member 1238 is opened at the rear end sides of the upper guide portion 1238e and the right guide portion 1238f, and is attached to the unit front base 1230, so that the rear end side opened by the front surface portion 1230a is closed.

In the V winning opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is rotatably supported in the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly higher than the upper and lower center near the right end in front view. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is rotatably attached to the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly left from the center in front view. The drive gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 mesh with each other between the shaft portion 1233a and the shaft member 1235 of the drive gear member 1233, and the V winning solenoid 1232 is arranged. Has been done.

In the V winning opening unit 1220B, the V winning opening 1156 is opened forward at a position below the center of the rotating body 1236 and directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233.

Energization/non-energization of the V winning solenoid 1232 is performed at a constant cycle under the control of the main control board 4100. When the V winning solenoid 1232 is not energized, the plunger 1232a projects downward due to the urging force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the downwardly projecting plunger 1232a, and the drive gear member 1233 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view about the shaft portion 1233a. Near the end of the gear 1233c in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it meshes with the vicinity of the end of the driven gear 1234a in the counterclockwise direction of the driven gear member 1234 (see FIG. 120(b)). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 is in a state of extending upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is in a state of being detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

Then, by the shaft member 1235 whose rear end side is mounted to the driven gear member 1234, the rotating body 1236 mounted to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 turns the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right side in front view. It is in the state of the discharge position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the right opening 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a state of being connected to each other. The upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

As a result, when the game ball is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a through the right opening 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f to the V winning opening 1156 and received. The game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the pair of specific sensors 1239, and the lower end of the first discharge path 1230d. Is discharged downward from.

On the other hand, the game ball T that has been received by the prize winning hole 1155 of the prize winning hole unit 120B and has reached the upper opening 1238b through the ball entrance 1238d and the upper guiding portion 1238e of the ball guiding member 1238 is the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236. The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent the receiving portion 1236a from receiving, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 that is inclined so as to narrow the rear end side opens to the rear side below the upper guiding portion 1238e. It enters into the loss hole 1230c of the front surface part 1230a of the front unit base 1230, is guided downward by the second discharge passage 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the V shift sensor 1240 and is detected by the second discharge passage 1230e. Is discharged downward from the lower end of.

When the V winning solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232a rises against the biasing force of the coil spring. As the plunger 1232a rises, the drive gear member 1233 rotates clockwise in a front view around the shaft portion 1233a by the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. When the driving gear member 1233 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 meshing with the driving gear 1233c causes the entire driven gear member 1234 to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise about the shaft member 1235. Rotate. As a result, the rotary body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 also rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise in front view via the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 on the rear end side. Become.

When the rotating body 1236 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees, the receiving portion 1236a is directed upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. This causes the receiving portion 1236a to be in communication with the upper guiding portion 1238e through the upper opening 1238b (see FIG. 120(a)).

With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 facing upward, when the game ball is discharged from the accessory winning hole unit 1220A side and enters the ball inlet 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, the upper portion passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e. It is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 from the mouth 1238b. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the game ball further enters the ball entrance 138b, the entered game ball T passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and receives the rotating body 1236. After coming into contact with the game ball T received by the portion 1236a from above, it enters the loss hole 1230c opening to the rear side and is discharged downward through the second discharging portion 130e of the unit front base 1230. It

At this time, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, and even if the game ball T comes into contact with the game ball T from above, the game ball T may come off from the receiving portion 1236a. Absent. Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center of the upper guiding portion 1238e in the front-rear direction) is slightly rearward with respect to the center of the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. As a result, another game ball T coming from the rear comes into contact with the position slightly rearward of the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, so that another game ball T coming from above is contacted. It is possible to guide the game ball T to the rear with the loss hole 1230c, and it is possible to reliably discharge another game ball T that came later from the loss hole 1230c downward through the second discharge path 1230e.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. 124(a), first, of the game balls, the game supplied first. The sphere comes to be held by the receiving portion 1236a. Then, with respect to each game ball supplied thereafter, the game ball is guided by the contact with the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a, and then comes into the misalignment hole 1230c (V misalignment sensor 1240). Detected by). On the other hand, the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a, when the rotating body 1236 operates from the operating state shown in FIG. 124(a) to the operating state shown in FIG. 124(b), The holding is released and the V winning opening 1156 is entered (detected by the specific sensor 1239).

On the other hand, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. 124(b), all of these game balls are guided by contact with the rotating body 1236. It comes to enter into the loss hole 1230c (detected by the V loss sensor 1240).

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position on the way. A center accessory 1130 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center accessory 1130.

Further, behind the center accessory 1130, there is provided an effect display device 1115 for displaying an effect with a large area in front view so as to attract the player's attention. As the effect display device 1115, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information in which decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information and the like are combined is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1115.

On the other hand, from the right side region to the lower side region of the center role object 1130 in the game area 1100, the gate member 1134, the general winning opening 1151, the role winning opening 1155, the second starting opening 1153, the first starting opening 1152, and the big winning. A mouth 1154 is provided. However, among these, the first starting port 1152 is provided so that only the game ball T flowing down the left side area of the center role object 1130 can be won, and the big winning port 1154 is the left side of the center role object 1130. It is provided so that the game ball T flowing down either the area or the right area can be won.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls T stored in the dish unit 300 are played one by one (at intervals of 0.6 seconds) on the game board 4. The upper portion of the region 1100 can be driven. The game ball T hit in the game area 1100 flows down so as to pass through either the left or right of the center accessory 1130. As a result, when one of the winning openings is won, the number of gaming balls T corresponding to the accepted winning opening is paid out to the dish unit 300, but no winning opening is won. In the case, it is discharged from the out port 1112a opened at the lower end of the game area 1100. In addition, the game ball T discharged from the outlet 1112a, the general winning opening 1151, the first starting opening 1152, the second starting opening 1153, the big winning opening 1154, and the prize winning opening 1155 is not returned to the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 that is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center accessory 1130, it is opened to the lower center of the center accessory 1130 in the left-right direction. The warp exit 1132 is being released into the game area 1100 again. Immediately below the warp exit 1132, the first starting opening 1152 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward, and the game ball T emitted from the warp exit 1132 has a very high probability of being the first starting opening. It is accepted by 1152.

Here, the first starting port 1152 is generally centered in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the effect display device 1115, the game ball can be always accepted. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 1152, the first starting opening sensor 1190 (FIG. 126) detects the entry (winning) of the game ball. At this time, when it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, it is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical value range. Based on the random number for one special symbol, the first special symbol lottery (first special determination) for the hit (small hit, big hit) that triggers the opening of the prize winning slot 1155 and the big winning slot 1154 is performed, and The first special symbol dynamically displayed on the one special symbol display device 1185 (FIG. 126) is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The first special symbol display device 1185 is provided as a part of the function display device 1114, for example.

As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the variation display is finished, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is formed in a pattern according to the kind of the small hit. Energize to open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after this variable display is finished, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern according to the kind of the big hit, The special winning opening 1154 is opened (big hit game). Then, after the big hit game is played, it is possible to control the shift to a time saving game state, which will be described later, in which the ease of accepting the game ball into the second starting port 1153 is improved.

As will be described later, when the first starting opening sensor 1190 detects a game ball entering (winning), the main control board 4100 also sends a payout command to the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 126). To do. That is, in this case, the payout control board 4110 causes the number of game balls T (for example, three) according to the received payout command to be paid out to the dish unit 300.

On the other hand, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows rightward from the upper part of the center accessory 1130 (right hitting), it enters the right flow path 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center accessory 1130. Then, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e arranged at the substantially vertical center of the game area 1100. The general winning opening 1151 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward below the discharge opening 1133e.

When the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 by a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the payout control board 4110 has a number (for example, 10) corresponding to the received payout command. The game ball T is paid out to the dish unit 300.

The game ball T that has flowed down on the right side of the center winning object 1130 and has not been received in the general winning opening 1151 passes through either the left or right of the receiving portion 1161b in the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 that closes the accessory winning opening 1155 of the accessory unit 1220. Then, the game ball T that has flowed down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a rolls to the left on the upper surface of the door portion 1221a below the character winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f, and the character winning opening from the left end of the door portion 1221a. It rolls to the upper surface of the left shelf portion 1161g and is discharged to the lower left from the left end of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g.

Then, the game ball T discharged from the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g flows down to the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and rolls to the left on the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. It is discharged from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j to the lower left. The game ball T discharged from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j abuts the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m on the left side thereof, and moves downward along the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. Run down to. The game ball T flowing down along the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m flows down onto the second starting opening area lower shelf portion 1161i, and the upper surface of the second starting opening area lower shelf portion 1161i is leftward. After rolling to, it comes to be discharged to the lower left from the left end of the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i so as to pass through the front surface of the special winning opening 1154.

On the other hand, when the game ball is received (passed) to the gate member 1134 in the right flow path 1133, it is detected by the gate sensor 1135 (see FIG. 126) which will be described later. At this time, when it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined normal starting condition is established, the main control board 4100 is regularly updated (generated every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on the random number for the symbol, the determination process (ordinary determination) for the normal hit which is the operation trigger of the starting opening door member 1214 as the movable piece is performed, and the normal symbol display 1189 (FIG. 126) dynamically displays. The normal pattern to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal winning is won, the drive control of the later-described normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 126) including the starting opening solenoid 1215 and the like is performed after this variable display is completed. As a result, the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 to the appearance position is performed.

However, as described above, the second starting opening 1153 and the starting opening door member 1214 according to this embodiment do not receive the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 even if the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is performed. It is provided with a structure that is not always allowed (isolated island type winning port, dragonfly type movable member).

That is, in the second starting opening 1153 according to the present embodiment, even if the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is performed according to the winning of the normal winning, the operation is a bridging time shorter than the prize winning threshold time. If it is only performed, the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 can not be crossed over the game ball and spills, so that the second starting opening 1153 cannot be accepted. Therefore, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment crosses over the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 only when the operation by the starting port door member 1214 is projected for a time longer than the prize winning threshold time. It is possible to make the game ball T accepted.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, even when the normal judgment is a normal win, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, from the prize winning threshold time Even short bridging times are selected. In this manner, by completely eliminating the possibility that the game ball T that is received in the second starting opening 1153 will be generated by crossing the starting opening door member 1214 in the normal game state, the second starting opening 1153 side The lottery can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the normal judgment is won in the time saving game state, the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 is a bridge longer than the prize winning threshold time. Be sure to choose a time. Therefore, in the time saving game state, the player hits the game ball in the right side area of the center role object 1130 in the game area 1100 (right hitting), so that the second side on which the game condition is extremely advantageous is set. It becomes possible to enjoy the game (second special symbol lottery) according to the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening 1153.

When the game ball is received in the second starting port 1153, a second starting port sensor 1191 (see FIG. 126) described later detects the entry (winning) of the game ball. And at this time, if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, based on a random number for the second special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical value range, a prize for prize is won. The second special symbol lottery (second special judgment) for the hit (small hit, big hit) that will be the opening opportunity of the mouth 1155 and the special winning opening 1154, and is dynamically displayed on the second special symbol display device 1186 (Fig. 126). The displayed second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The second special symbol display device 1186 is provided as a part of the function display device 1114, for example.

As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the variation display is finished, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is formed in a pattern according to the kind of the small hit. Energize to open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after this variable display is finished, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern according to the kind of the big hit, The special winning opening 1154 is opened (big hit game).

Here, in the small hit game, the V winning solenoid 1232 is de-energized in a state where any of the game balls that have entered the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the rotating body 1236 rotates clockwise, the game ball that has been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is guided to the V winning opening 1156. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the big hit game is started when the specific sensor 1239 detects that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 as well as when the big hit is won. Therefore, control for opening and closing the special winning opening 1154 is performed in a predetermined pattern.

In the big hit game, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the special winning opening 1154 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the big winning opening 1154. When the opening/closing control pattern for controlling the special winning opening 1154 in the closed state based on is a one-round round game, this round game is executed so as to be repeated for the number of rounds corresponding to the type of “big hit”. It will be.

When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 1154 or the accessory winning opening 1155 while these games are being played, the main control board 4100 displays the result of detection by the special winning opening sensor 1206 or the accessory winning opening sensor 1224. Based on this, a payout command is sent to the payout control board 4110. Thereby, in the payout control board 4110, the number (for example, 10) of game balls corresponding to the received payout command is paid out to the dish unit 300.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the display by the function display 1114, based on the command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 displays various effect images on the effect display device 1115. It is displayed so that the player can be entertained.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, as an advantageous game condition described above that can be set for the lottery on the second starting opening 1153 side, a jackpot game in the second special symbol lottery. The probability of getting a hit (big hit, advantageous small hit) is 10 times higher than the probability of getting a big hit game (big hit, advantageous small hit) in the first special symbol lottery. It is supposed to be set to.

That is, in this case, in the short time gaming state in which the bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time is selected as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, the lottery for hitting the big hit game (big hit, advantageous small hit) Will be performed with a high probability (second special symbol lottery).

Moreover, for the random number for the second special symbol (high-accuracy starting information) acquired on the second starting opening 1153 side, the bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time is selected as the operating time of the starting opening door member 1214. Although it is something that can be acquired and stored only when (in the time saving game state), even after this is finished, the memory itself is a predetermined number (the number of second special symbols reserved). Up to 4) can be held.

Therefore, prior to the end of the time saving game state, a random number for the second special symbol (high-precision starting information) is retained as a reserved state up to a predetermined number, so that the number of reserved games is a normal game. Since the lottery can be performed while the probability of winning the big hit game even after being controlled to the state is high, it becomes possible to reduce the enjoyment of the game when the time saving game state ends Can be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as a type thereof, the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is selected. A big hit game can be started as long as you play (continue right-handed game) so that the state where the game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) (waiting state for winning) The hit is always selected.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, as a result of the second special symbol lottery based on the random number for the second special symbol (high-precision starting information), a small hit (advantageous When a small hit is obtained, control is performed to promote winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 1153 until the opening period of the accessory winning opening 1155 corresponding to the small hit ends. .. That is, in this case, since it is possible to start the big hit game after securing the number of holding of the second special symbol lottery to its upper limit value, it is controlled to shift to the normal game state after the big hit game is played. Even if it is, it is possible to carry out the lottery with the number of holdings being high even after the big game is started after being controlled to the normal game state. ..

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time saving game state, the second special symbol lottery (the game on the side where the probability of getting a big start game is high) As a result, after the big hit game is played, the short-time gaming state is temporarily ended without being continued. On the other hand, in the case where the random number for the second special symbol (high-accuracy starting information) is left as a holding state before the time saving game state ends, after the transition control to the normal game state is performed. After the big hit game is performed as a result of the second special symbol lottery (the one on the side where the probability of getting the big hit game is high) being already held is digested, the time saving game The state is controlled to shift again.

That is, in this case, even if the transition control to the time saving game state is performed, the jackpot game is performed as a result of the second special symbol lottery at a relatively early stage, and it is almost certain that the time saving game state is once ended. (In the second special symbol lottery, a high probability that exceeds 10 times the probability obtained when starting the big hit game in the first special symbol lottery). Therefore, if the player wins the big hit game when the player is in the normal game state, from the sense of the player side, the big hit game at the time of the selection and the transition to the time saving game state are controlled and immediately obtained. The big hit game for two times with the big hit game expected to be provided will be provided as one set of big hit game.

Then, each time one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is provided in this way, it is returned to the normal game state, but in the normal game state, it is put on hold when the time saving game state is set to the second hold state. It is possible to digest the special symbol lottery (a game on which the probability of getting a big hit game is high). In other words, even in the normal game state, it is possible to digest the game (second special symbol lottery) on the side where the probability of getting a big jackpot game is high, by the number of reserves, Is it possible to win the big hit game before the end of the digestion of the holding number so that it can be controlled again to shift to the time saving game state (one set of big hit game (two big hit games? ) Can be started again), and you will be able to enjoy innovative gameplay such as.

In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the probability that an advantageous small hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery is “1/6”, and the upper limit value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol lottery is Since it is "4", in the normal game state returned every time the above-mentioned one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is provided, the four second special symbol lottery already in the pending state is consumed. The probability of winning the big hit game while going is "671/1296" (=1-(5/6)4) even if the probability of getting the big hit is excluded.

In this way, the above-mentioned one set of big hit game (two big hit games) has a performance (basically, a performance in which the advantageous state is continued) that can be looped with a probability of 50% or more. So, including the period until the suspension of the second special symbol lottery in the normal game state is completed, position the period after the transition control to the time saving game state as a special game state advantageous to the player Will be able to. According to such a special game state, each time succeeding in continuing the special game state with a probability of 50% or more (in the normal game state, the four second special symbol lottery in the suspended state is exhausted. Every time you win the big hit game in the meantime), you will be able to win an amount of prizes according to the big hit game for two times. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

However, while providing such a set of big hit game (two big hit games), the result of the first special symbol lottery when the game is in a shorter working time (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) If there is a case where a big hit game according to is started, it will be controlled again to the time saving game state after the big hit game (see FIG. 141). That is, in this case, the big hit game is played at least three times, including the big hit game according to the result of the first special symbol lottery, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game by such a premium game. Like In addition, in the big hit game according to the result of the first special symbol lottery (first big hit, first advantageous small hit), it is possible to obtain only about 400 game balls. While realizing a premium game, if the game on the first special symbol lottery side is intentionally advanced while in the time saving game state, it is disadvantageous to the player side, and the load on the hall side does not occur It is like this.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as a type thereof, the upper surface (specification of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is specified. There is an advantageous small hit that can start the big hit game as long as you play (continue the right-handed game) so that the state where the game ball exists in the rolling area (the waiting state for winning) is maintained It is as described above that it is selected.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the principle by which the big hit game can be started when an advantageous small hit is obtained will be described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, the upper surface of the character winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state (specific A structure that allows at least one or more game balls (a few here) to continue to exist in the rolling area is adopted. On the other hand, when at least one game ball is present on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) in the closed state, the character prize opening/closing When the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated in the open state, the game balls are spilled from the upper surface of the character winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the inside area of the character winning opening 1155. It is designed to enter.

According to such a configuration, as long as the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 moves to the open state, even if the operating time is extremely short, the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (the door portion). It becomes possible to enter the game ball existing on the upper surface of 1221a) into the inside area of the winning a prize slot 1155. In addition, since the game balls that have already been fired (game balls that are in a prize-waiting state) will automatically enter the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155, It is possible to more accurately control the timing of entry of the game ball into the internal area.

In this regard, as will be described later, in the internal area of the prize winning port 1155, a certain distribution operation (see FIG. 142(e)) appears so as to appear from a specific timing (here, the timing of the symbol stop). A rotating body (sorting device) 1236 capable of guiding the game ball that has entered the internal area to either the V winning opening 1156 or the losing hole 1230c is provided. That is, with respect to such a distribution operation of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the V winning opening can be controlled more accurately while the entry timing of the game ball into the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. The prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state so that the game ball winning waiting state is released aiming at the timing of being guided to 1156.

According to such a configuration, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery is an advantageous small hit, the game is performed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the winning prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). A rotating body (shake) that performs a certain sort operation (see FIG. 142(e)) as long as the game (continue the right-handed game) is maintained so that the state in which the ball exists (waiting state for winning) Minute device) 1236 is guided to the V winning opening 1156 at a precise timing, the game ball comes into the internal area of the winning a prize opening 1155. Can be started (big hit control). As a result, it is possible to start the big hit game not only when the big hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery but also when the advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery, by setting the probability that the advantageous small hit can be obtained, to increase the winning probability of starting the big hit game to the first special symbol lottery to a high probability exceeding 10 times. Will be able to.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, basically, in order to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the prize winning port 1155, , Only the game balls that are already in the winning waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) can enter the internal area of the winning a prize opening 1155. Only for a short time (a short time for refusing to win the game balls that are not in the prize-waiting state), the prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state. It should be noted that such a time (time for operating the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state) should be at least shorter than the interval between game ball firings (0.6 seconds). Therefore, it is required to make it difficult for a new game ball to be supplied while it is in the open state.

As a result, variations in the winning timing of the game balls when the accessory winning port 1155 is opened are less likely to occur, and therefore, a fixed distribution operation (see FIG. 142(e)) appears in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. By determining in advance which of the V winning opening 1156 and the loss hole 1230c, the game ball can be made to enter the internal area.

As will be described later, the probability that a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment is extremely low (1/400), and the probability that a small hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery is also set. The probability is as low as the same (7/1200). However, in the second special symbol lottery, for the big hit, although the winning probability is the same as the first special symbol lottery (both 1/400), but for the small hit (advantageous small hit), the big hit The winning probability is more than 10 times higher (for example, 1/6). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are reserved, the second special symbol lottery is first digested regardless of the reservation order.

According to such a configuration, in the time saving game state, of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the game centered on the second special symbol lottery on the side that has an extremely high winning probability ( Further speaking, the game of the second special symbol lottery side only) will be advanced, and as a result of such progress, an advantageous small hit will usually be immediately obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery. Then, by the end of the opening period of the prize winning opening 1155 corresponding to the advantageous small hit, the number of holding the second special symbol lottery is the upper limit because the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 1153 is prompted. While the value is secured, by opening the accessory winning hole 1155 at the timing when the game ball that has already been launched and is in the winning waiting state is guided to the V winning opening 1156 ( By playing a game), it becomes possible to generate a big hit game corresponding to this.

Incidentally, when an advantageous small hit is obtained, the small hit game in which the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball which has already been fired and is in the prize waiting state is guided to the V winning hole 1156. Since it is possible to generate a big hit game corresponding to this, by generating such a small hit game and a big hit game corresponding thereto, one bonus game that can win a large number of prizes Alternatively, it may be provided to the player.

However, each time a small win (advantageous win) is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, simply realizing a high V winning probability such that a game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 causes "winning a prize." Machine lottery when the V prize hole 1156 is provided, such as "providing game play based on a machine lottery such as whether or not a game ball is accepted in the V prize hole 1156 with a predetermined machine lottery probability in the area inside the mouth 1155". There is a possibility that the basic game play related to will be destroyed. It is usually desired to set such a machine lottery probability with a low probability of about 1/10 or less.

Therefore, in consideration of such a situation, when the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened according to the small hit (advantageous small hit) obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, in the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155. It is conceivable that more than ten game balls are made to enter so that only one of the game balls is received in the V winning opening 1156. However, the small hit (advantageous small hit) obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery can be set as the open time during the small hit game, unlike the big hit aimed at achieving a large number of prizes. The upper limit of the time to be set is 1.8 seconds, and the upper limit of the number that can be set as the number of game balls detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 during the small hit game is regulated to be 10. It has become one.

Here, considering that the firing interval at which the game balls can be continuously fired when the player operates the handle device 500 is 0.6 seconds, the number of game balls that can be won during the small hit game is It can be understood that the number is usually only three by the calculation formula of "1.8 seconds/0.6 seconds". Further, even if a large number of game balls can be won during the small hitting game, when the number of game balls detected by the prize hole sensor 1224 reaches 10, the prize hole 1155 is closed. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that more than 10 game balls can stably enter the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155 during the small hit game, and by necessity, to the V winning hole 1156. Despite the guidance, it can be said that it is difficult to set the machine lottery probability to a probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above,
(A) The length in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in the specific rolling region) is L (for example, 6 cm), When the time of the firing interval when the game balls T are continuously driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds), the winning/winning part winning opening/closing A structure such as a structure that engages with a game ball rolling in the passage so that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game ball T on the upper surface of the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less than "L/2T". By having (a), as long as the player continues to hit the right side, at least two (2, 3) or more (2, 3) are provided on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. It allows the game ball to exist.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(B) When the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is changed from the closed state to the open state, all the game balls in the winning waiting state to the winning prize opening 1155 are the winning prize opening 1155. A structure such as an internal passage in which the time required for a game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 is longer than the total ball entry time required to enter the internal area By having (b), the game ball that has entered the internal area is provided for the determination of the closing of the winning a prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the upper limit value determination for the number of gaming balls T that can be won). All game balls that are in the prize-waiting state can enter and end before reaching the detection position (the prize winning hole sensor 1224).

According to such configurations (a) and (b), it becomes possible to positively generate the overflow prize for the upper limit value (up to 10 in the small hit game) of the game balls that can be won. ..

Moreover, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(C) With respect to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls so that the plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) spill into the character prize hole 1155 almost at the same time. Character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) provided so as to slide in a vertical direction (backward direction).
By having such a configuration (C), each time the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 are irrespective of the number of them. Since it is possible to enter the inside of the prize winning opening 1155 all at once, it is possible to reduce the time required for winning the prize winning opening 1155 to the utmost.

And as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(D) At least two or more game balls are used as the predetermined closing interval time when the opening control of the prize winning opening 1155 is divided into a plurality of short opening times with a predetermined closing interval time. The time required to reach the right side of the article prize opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) (time more than twice the firing interval (for example, 1.2 seconds or more)) is adopted, and the above short opening time is also adopted. As a time required for a game ball in a prize-waiting state to spill into the prize winning opening 1155 due to the sliding operation of the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, By performing control such as adopting (0.12 seconds), each time the short opening operation appears, even though the short opening operation is shorter than the firing interval (the expected value for winning is less than one in the calculation), All the at least two or more game balls that are in the prize-waiting state while the predetermined closing interval time has elapsed can be collectively entered into the internal area of the prize winning port 1155.

With such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when in the open state, and due to such excellent winning performance, the regulation for the above-mentioned small hit game is restricted. Even when the game ball is always guided to the V winning opening 1156, the machine lottery probability can be set at a low probability value of about 1/10 or less.

For example, when the total time allowed as the opening time during the small hitting game is 1.8 seconds and 0.12 seconds is adopted as the above-mentioned short opening time, the prize winning opening 1155 is divided into 15 times. It can be opened for a short time. In this case, in consideration of the fact that every time the short opening appears, all of the two or three game balls that are in the prize-waiting state will all enter into the internal area of the prize winning slot 1155 all at once. Then, when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened shortly in 15 times, at least 30 game balls will be won in the prize winning opening 1155.

However, according to the regulation for the small hit game described above, the tenth game ball is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 before the opening control is completely exhausted. The small hit game is ended based on the detection. In this respect, in the above configuration, every time a short opening appears, all of the two or three game balls that are in the prize-waiting state enter into the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 all at once. For example, it is hard to think that only 10 game balls will be won by the end of the small hit game, and it is considered that there are frequent cases where an overflow prize occurs and 11, 12 game balls are won. Therefore, during the small hitting game in which such control is carried out, an average of more than 10 game balls come into the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155, whereby the V winning hole 1156. Even in the case where the player is always guided to any of the game balls, the machine lottery probability can be set at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 is a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I/O port 4100b as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. .. The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 1190 for detecting a game ball received in the first starting opening 1152 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second starting opening 1153. 1191 and the detection signal from the general winning a prize sensor 1180 which detects the game ball received in the general winning a prize 1151 are respectively inputted through the main control I/O port 4100b, the gate sensor 1135, the special winning a prize sensor 1206. Detection signals from the prize winning sensor 1224 and the specific sensor 1239 are input via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I/O port 4100b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I/O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the main control MPU 4100a has a starting opening solenoid 1215 via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to the accessory drive mechanism 3114, an attacker drive mechanism 2121 having an accessory win solenoid 1225 or an attacker solenoid 1204, a V prize solenoid 1232, a main control I/O port 4100b, a panel relay board 3040, and a function display. First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display through the substrate 1114 A drive signal is output to 1188, the game state indicator 1183, and the round indicator 1182.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information (game information) related to games and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I/O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various kinds of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I/O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720. , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[Payout controller]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payouts on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I/O port 4111b as an I/O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, referred to as an “external WDT 4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is normally operating. ), and a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), as well as for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I/O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, and the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay substrate 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted through the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I/O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I/O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 with an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED indicator 4130 via the payout control I/O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is issued via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The serial number is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I/O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display unit 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board), and when the number “1” is displayed, it means “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. And the game ball are engaged with each other in the vicinity of the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate, and when the number "3" is displayed, it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, Indicates that there is a defect in the counting sensor 751 based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and indicates that it is a "retry error" when the number "5" is displayed (specifically, The fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value is notified, and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full tank" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). That the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR not connected" ( The fact that the electrical connection has been cut off in any part from the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock" (specifically Indicates that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and this signal is issued to the payout control I/O. It is adapted to be received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number indicator 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number display 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the firing control unit 4120, which performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball forwarding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585, has a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to firing are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillating circuit 4120b so that 100 gaming balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball-sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle body 504, and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player. Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle main body 504 is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main-side relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

Based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d outputs a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle body 504, and a launch reference pulse. Is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball-sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e supplies a constant current to the ball-sending solenoid 585 through the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball-sending reference pulse is input. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and the input of the ball sending reference pulse is ended, which is a constant current. By stopping the output of, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see Exhibit 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. A second liquid crystal display device 3252 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing.

[Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I/O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear face of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port for outputting drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. Door side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5, and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation light-up signal to a color LED or the like, and door-side drive light-emission data from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base substrate 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 or displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is displayed on the liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting from the control unit serial I/O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the peripheral relay terminal board 882, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances are played, and the peripheral frame relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194 are connected to the door frame 5. Control is performed so that music and sound effects suitable for various effects are played from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”) built in the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, the peripheral control unit 4140 has an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, “peripheral control external unit”) not shown. WDT”) is also provided, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input/output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral data MPU4140a outputs to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command. , A plurality of serial input/output ports different from the display command are used. In this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the door frame. 5 output to the LED of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received blinking command on the game board side. The decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 and the like provided on the game board 4 output to the LEDs. In addition, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 etc. which were provided in the game board 4, each solenoid, etc.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, or receives a signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts the sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Thus, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

[Abnormal noise prevention measures]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that requires electric power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speaker 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It has an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base substrate 194, wirings that connect various audio equipments, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010, and the like are collectively bundled and extended rearward. It is adapted to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

In addition, at the location (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is provided, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the inside of the game area 1100 despite being shot by the hitting ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not arrived to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, the game balls (metal) pass at a high speed while coming into contact with the wall surface of the passage, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate in this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin only escapes around the ground even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to the electrostatic induction due to this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity thereof may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage is generated). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, a sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), and the sound becomes unpleasant to the player. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set higher.

The embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and if the abnormal audio signal is detected, The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal sound signal blocking board (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding the audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports and the like, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the various commands are output. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 126).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and a lower portion provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base board 194, and the like. The speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 are controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played (see FIGS. 126 and 127).

[Abnormal voice signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. 127 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 128 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 127, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by a wiring 196, and the periphery of the door frame base board 194 A +24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal 882 is provided. The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 128, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the +24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the sound signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194. -The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

Further, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 outputs a woofer+ signal and a woofer signal, which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821 and supplies and outputs them to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by static electricity noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a place far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 at a position where it is unlikely to be affected by the static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent the abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal sound signal blocking board]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884 detects whether the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is cut off so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 128, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 detects an abnormal sound signal from the sound signal and outputs an abnormal sound signal, and outputs from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal.

The +24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the +24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. The ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

The woofer + signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888 and the other is It is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

Also, a woofer signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, arranged in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit). It is mainly composed of an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the woofer + signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 which supplies the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the latter stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the latter stage of the rectification bridge. The 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose voltage is substantially 0V is connected by cutting the minus part by the circuit.

Then, in the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the waveform of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the +voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the +voltage line 890. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the +voltage waveform is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the stage subsequent to the connection point of the capacitor SC2 on the +voltage line 890, and the smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, the +voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7, which appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1, is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the +voltage line 890 at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the +voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the transistor STR3, and the relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the eighth terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer+signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 serves as an external output of the woofer+signal and is connected to the lower speaker harness 819. Through an external lower speaker 821.

Furthermore, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil+input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the 5th of the relay SRL1 is connected. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 to the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895. It is like this.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal voice signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer+ signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, In FIG. 128, a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the +voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

Next, during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

In this way, when a normal audio signal (waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also remain in the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not practically turn on.

<Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, and the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is inactive (the contact is closed), and the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are inactive. It is the A contact (the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal is input for a certain period of time] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage of +24V, +18V, +1.5V, etc.) with a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode SD2 and the diode are provided in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. SD3 becomes conductive, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom in electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the increase in the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is not applied. This approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR2 and SR4) , A resistor SR5, a Zener diode SZD1, a resistor SR6, and a resistor SR7, a current flows, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photo coupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed with noise removed by the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the second terminal and the No. terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in an excited state, and the B contact between the terminals 5 and 6 of the relay SRL1 is in the operating state (the contact is open), and the connection between the terminals 3 and 4 is in the operating state. It becomes A contact (contact closed). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer+signal of the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Moreover, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to a conductive state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The state of conduction of the coil is maintained and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 of the woofer+ signal remains blocked.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs the abnormality detection signal (photo coupler). Turns on). Upon receiving the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 supplies the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 by operating the relay SRL1. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal voice is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off by the woofer+ signal. Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal voice signal can be grasped by the staff or the output stop state of the voice is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is released by re-turning on the power of the gaming machine. It is possible to return to a normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input due to the audio signal being extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 become conductive, the charging current flows from the top to the bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. To be done.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and the charging current flows from the upper side to the lower side in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal voice signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal voice signal, even if the peak-shaped waveform has the same width in the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 to rapidly charge the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in electric charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal audio signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be briefly described.

When the transistor STR1 turns on, the transistor STR2 turns on, and when the transistor STR2 turns on, the photocoupler SPC1 turns on. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and the transistor STR3 is turned on, so that the relay SRL1 operates and the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are cut off. Then, the output of the woofer+signal on the woofer+signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer+signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormal sound from being generated by the abnormal audio signal of the excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 126, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1115. The character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and the character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in the character ROM 4150d.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to produce the effect display device 1115 or the first display. The drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b stores various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, as well as schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1115 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1115. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c adopts a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1115 is held in the line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer is held in the effect display device 1115 or. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1115 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1115 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1115. For example, when various people are displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position arranged on the screen or in a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”), and the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device are set. 3252.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 characters arranged in a horizontal 2×vertical 3 manner can be used. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, more characters can be used for expression. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 have main scanning that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from the left to the right when viewed from the front, and crosses the main scanning. The sub-scanning is performed by repeatedly performing the main scanning in the direction. When the rendering data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the effect display device 1115 moves from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. Sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and when drawing data for the next line is input in the same manner, the next line is output. Based on the drawing data of minutes, main output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Control processing in the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 140. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt processing is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a special symbol control process. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the variation start process of the special symbol. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process of a special symbol. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol changing process. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hitting game start process of the special symbol. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hitting game process of a special symbol. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol big hit game start process. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol big hit game process.

[About main processing]
In the main processing, as shown in FIG. 129, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes power-on processing (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value at the time of power outage), and is normal. If there is, a process to restore the state at the time of power failure (process at power recovery) is executed according to the backup data stored in the RAM, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial Settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.).

When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

Further, in the power-on process, a process for setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 to be transmittable when the normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress status of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. The backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored again. When the supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for games. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the power supply board stops supplying the power supply voltage to the main control board 4100. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the processing when power failure occurs is executed (step S4).

This power failure occurrence process is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of a power failure as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) to start from. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power-off occurrence processing is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of a power failure warning signal detection. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About processing when power is cut off]
Next, as shown in FIG. 130, the power-off occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure advance notice signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used when power is restored to check whether the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a stipulated value indicating that the power-off occurrence process has been performed (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In addition, in this process, when the power supply interruption process is started due to the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is entered due to the instantaneous power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on, after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main processing, and as shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the process of saving the registers (step S10), and then executes the processes of step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-mentioned switches (gate switch, starting port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number updating process 2 may be updated in the random number updating process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set to the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control processing of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker drive mechanism 2121). By controlling the prize winning opening/closing member 1221 and the prize winning opening/closing member 1203) for opening/closing the prize winning opening 1155 and the prize winning opening 1154, the opening/closing state of the prize winning opening 1155 and the prize winning opening 1154 can be changed. To execute the process.

In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for a normal win or loss that triggers the operation of the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, after the end of the big hit gaming state, if a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition to shortening the time required for control, the drive mode of the starting opening door member 1214 is changed to execute the lottery processing so that winning in the second starting opening 1153 is allowed (so-called time saving game. Status). In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game is in the time-saving game state or not, when the normal lottery is performed, the regular win is surely won. However, when the time-saving game state is not performed (in the normal game state, Sometimes), as the operation time of the starting door member 1214, a bridge shorter than the prize winning threshold time required until the game ball T rolls on the upper surface of the starting door member 1214 and is received by the second starting opening 1153. While only the time is selected, in the time saving game state, a bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time is always selected as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, each time the player hits the game ball into the right side area of the center role object 1130 in the game area 1100 (right hitting) only in the time saving game state, each time the starting opening door member 1214 operates. The lottery for hitting the big hit game by entering the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 (big hit, advantageous small hit) can be performed with a high probability (second special). Design lottery).

In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer etc.), a drive signal is output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown). Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control unit 4140 is also performed. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used in the determination of whether to generate the jackpot gaming state (also called jackpot determination, jackpot lottery), the jackpot gaming state in jackpot determination Random number for big hit symbol used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to generate, whether to perform high-expectation production such as reach production when it is determined that it is not a hit in the big hit lottery Reach determination random number used for the determination (reach determination), the variable display pattern random number (fluctuation time) used to determine the variable display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185, 1186. Random number), a random number for round determination used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the special winning opening 1154 in the big hit game (special bonus game), and a starting opening that allows winning into the second starting opening 1153. There is a random number for normal win determination used for the determination (normal lottery win determination) as to whether or not the door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position (state located at the front side position).

In addition, the big hit symbol random number is also used for the judgment concerning the state type of the big hit (whether or not to activate the time saving function) performed when it is judged that the big hit is won.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, whether or not the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the round determination random number, and the starting opening door member 1214 related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state are positioned at the appearance position. Update the related random numbers per ordinary symbol. That is, the random number used for determining whether the big hit game state occurs and whether or not the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability of determining that a big hit game state is generated, probability of determining that the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position) in a predetermined period for each random number is constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update processing 2, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, and the like which are not related to the occurrence of the big hit game state and the normal lottery are updated.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, a first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed. In this first/second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153. Then, after the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed, a process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from among a plurality of processes shown in the figure (steps S120 to S240). Will be done.

More specifically, when the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is completed, it is first determined whether the process flag is 0 (step S120), and if the process flag is 0 ( If YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), it is determined which side of the game the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side will proceed, and the jackpot on the determined side. After the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery, the processing flag is updated to "1". In addition, the process related to the game (first special symbol, second special symbol) thus determined is a timer interrupt process every 4 ms until the updated process flag is returned to "0". It will be held continuously each time.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the special symbol (identification) displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186) on the side determined in the variation start process (step S130) The variation pattern of the symbol (variation time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186) is determined. After that, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S160). As a result, if the process flag is 2 (YES in step S160), the changing process (step S170) is executed. In this variation process, the variation time set in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol) is based on the time-out. The variable display of the special symbol on the display device 1186) is stopped. After that, when it is determined in the variation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to "5". On the other hand, when it is determined that a specific condition is established although the big hit is lost, the process selection flag is updated to "3" when the small hit is won (the small hit is won). However, when the jackpot is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is performed again.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S180). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180), the small hit game start processing (step S190) for creating an interval period before starting the small hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the processing flag is updated to "4" in the small hit game start processing.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S180 (NO in step S180), it is determined whether the processing flag is 4 (step S200). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S200), the small hit game process (step S210) is executed. In this small hit game processing, a small hit game in which the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is opened/closed (sliding operation) is performed in a control mode according to the type of small hit, and from the winning prize opening 1155. It is determined whether or not the game balls that have entered the internal area are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. Then, as a result, in the first small hitting game process, when it is determined that the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the first processing flag is set to "5" in order to start the big hitting game. Will be updated. However, if it is not determined that the game balls have been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 within a predetermined time, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is performed again.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200), it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S220). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220), the big hit game start processing (step S230) is executed. In this big hit game start processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "6".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 in step S220 (NO in step S220), it is determined that the processing flag is 6 and the jackpot game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game processing, the mode of the big hit game (the number of rounds, the opening time, the maximum number of prizes, etc.) for opening and closing the special winning opening 1154 is set, and the big winning opening opening/closing member 1203 is set based on the mode of the set big hit game. The opening/closing operation related to is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process (step S130) is performed again.

As described above, the special control process is performed when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S170, step S190, step S210, step S230, and step S240 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag. Is ended.

[Regarding the first and second starting mouth prize processing]
Next, the first/second starting mouth winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the first/second starting mouth winning process.

In the first/second starting mouth winning process (step S110), roughly, there is a process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153, and On the condition that it is determined that there is a ball entered, a process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 1191. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 1191, it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 1153 (YES in step S201). Then, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the second is provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the second start pending storage process (step S203), various data obtained by winning the game ball in the second starting opening 1153 (random number for jackpot determination, jackpot symbol) Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e.

In the process of step 203, a prize notification command indicating that there is a game ball entering the second starting opening 1153 (more precisely, a special symbol type, a holding order, etc.) is set, The winning notification command thus set may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, when the hold display on the second starting opening 1153 side is displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the like, this can be promptly updated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 1191 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value is 4, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 1190. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 1190, it is determined that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 1152 (YES in step S205), and the next. Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery are obtained (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.), and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. A determination is made as to whether the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a, first, as the first start pending storage process (step S207), various data obtained by the game ball entering the first starting opening 1152 (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol for Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e.

Even in the process of step 207, a prize notification command indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 1152 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) is set, The winning notification command thus set may be transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be promptly updated even in the case where the first starting port 1152 side hold display is performed on the effect display device 1115 or the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not been won in the first starting opening 1152, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting opening winning processing is ended at this point.

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting opening 1153 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting opening 1152 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 1152 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 1153 is executed may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a leading determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may send a command indicating the result of the leading determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The preceding determination process is a process that is performed prior to a lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, a jackpot lottery described later and determination of a variable display pattern), and determines the lottery result in advance. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The leading determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance determination process, the random number and the advance determination table are compared to determine the lottery result (the result of the big hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) when the lottery is performed using the random number. (The determination performed in advance of the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect that reflects the received winning notification command (advance determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "prefetching". Also referred to as "staging").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start process.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol memory indicators 1184 and 1187 (first start). It is determined whether or not both the memory number and the second start memory number are "0" (step S301). Here, with the value in the two reservation number counters corresponding to the special symbol storage display 1184, 1187, the number of games (lottery) on the first special symbol side and the game (lottery) on the second special symbol side are reserved. It shows the numbers and respectively. Therefore, in this step S301, if all the values of the holding number counter are “0” (YES), it is determined that neither the starting conditions for the first jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery have been established, and the interrupt concerned. The fluctuation start process within the process is once ended. That is, in this case, each time the above-mentioned interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301, is there a game (lottery) on the side of the first special symbol or a game (lottery) on the side of the second special symbol that is on hold? It will be determined whether or not, until the special symbol lottery process is determined to be in a suspended state, the progress of the special symbol game is substantially in the standby state It will be.

On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), to update the order of execution of the jackpot lottery on the special symbol side to be processed, Shift processing is performed in the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (steps S302 to S310).

In the first special symbol reserved storage area, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol (for example, the first random number for random determination, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, the first variable random number) Are stored based on the holding order of, the second special symbol reservation storage area, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol (for example, second random number for random determination, second symbol random number, second reach random number) , Second random numbers) are stored based on their reservation order.

The main control MPU4100a, when changing the special symbol, as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area), the special symbol holding storage area on the side to be processed is stored. Random numbers will be manipulated appropriately. That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out are not only processing related to the jackpot lottery, but also processing related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and opening/closing of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 and the winning opening/closing member 1203. By being subjected to processing related to mode setting, processing related to game state setting, etc., a starting game triggered by winning a game ball into the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153 can be progressed. become.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery process on the second special symbol side is performed, the jackpot game is started, compared to the case where the lottery process on the first special symbol side is performed. The lottery for winning (big hit, advantageous small hit) is performed with a high probability of 10 times or more.

In this regard, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area), the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol is always postponed, and it is a highly accurate side for the player. The random numbers stored in the random number storage area (special symbol holding storage area) are manipulated so that all the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning of the second starting opening 1153 can be exhausted first. I am trying to do it. As a result, the lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 1153 (the second special) which is the accurate side for the player until the number of holdings of the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0” Only the lottery of symbols) can be sequentially performed. Also, as will be described later, in the gaming state in which the so-called time saving function operates, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested first, is not interrupted so that the pending state of the lottery (variation) is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to lengthen the time for changing the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 1153, which is an execution trigger, the second special symbol is drawn continuously (variation). By doing so, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134, in the shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol, which is the preferentially digested side, is dealt with. It is determined whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting memory number) to be set is "0". Then, as a result, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is not "0" (NO in step S302), as the process of step S303, Of each storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a, a random number group stored in the first storage area (for example, a second random number for random determination, a second symbol random number, a second reach random number) , Second fluctuation random number) from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S304, the random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage region of the second special symbol reserved storage region of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- The shift operation is performed in the (Out) mode.

More specifically, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets "1" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the second special symbol side is in progress (step S305). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S306). Regarding the special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed by being confirmed every time the interrupt process is performed after the variation start process is completed. (Here, the second special symbol) is made recognizable, and is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the preferentially consumed side, is “0”. If (YES in step S302), as the processing of step S307, among the storage areas of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, the random number group stored in the first storage area (for example, , First winning/deciding random number, first symbol random number, first reach random number, first variation random number) are read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S308, the random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage region of the first special symbol reserved storage region of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- The shift operation is performed in the (Out) mode.

More specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the first special symbol side is in the progressing state (step S308). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S310). Regarding the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, after the variation start process is completed, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed is confirmed every time an interrupt process is performed. (Here, the first special symbol) is made recognizable, and is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example.

When the shift processing (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reserved storage area) is completed in this way, next, as the processing of step S311, the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag (above acquired). The lottery process for the winning, which is performed based on the random numbers for win/loss determination, is performed.

Here, in the special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141(a), it is a big hit based on one hit determination table regardless of the game state (normal game state, time saving game state). A determination process is performed as to whether it is a small hit, a reach loss, or a loss without reach.

More specifically, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the random number for win determination, in the table on the first special symbol side, among the 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the random number for first win determination. Three kinds of values match with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit has been hit, seven kinds of values match the small hit judgment value showing that the small hit has been hit, and 1190 kinds of values are the above-mentioned gaps. The 1200 types of values that can be obtained as the first hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the probability that a jackpot is obtained as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol is set to 1/400, The probability that a small hit will be obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery will be set to approximately 1/171.

When the value obtained as the first winning/deciding random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without a reach based on the value of the obtained first reach random number. ..

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment,
・Of the round games repeated 15 times, the big hit game is advanced under the special opening control that a large number of prizes can be practically obtained only for the four round games. After the jackpot game is executed, the first jackpot, which is a type that always generates a time saving game state, and also the opening control that enables a large amount of prizes to be won in all round games repeated 15 times. Although the big hit game is advanced with, only when the big hit game is executed in the normal game state (the game state in which the time saving function is not operating), the time saving game state is generated after the big hit game is executed. The second big hit is to be prepared.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the type of small hit,
A relatively short time as a time required to execute a small hit game among disadvantageous small hits that is a type in which the prize winning opening 1155 is opened in a manner that cannot be assigned to the V prize opening (specific area) 1156. The first disadvantage is the type adopted,
The V game prize hole (specific area) 1156 is the type of opening the character prize opening 1155 in a manner that cannot be allocated to the V prize hole 1156. Utilizing the above-described configuration in which variations are less likely to occur, the second disadvantage small hit, which is a type in which the accessory winning port 1155 is opened multiple times, among which it has been determined in advance that the guide hole 1230c should be guided,
Among the advantageous small hits, which are types in which the above-mentioned accessory winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball that has already been fired and is in the winning waiting state is guided to the V winning hole 1156. Similar to (or similar to) the above-mentioned second disadvantage small hit from the stop of the symbol to the middle stage after a predetermined time has passed, variation occurs in the winning timing of the game ball when the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened. Utilizing the above-mentioned configuration that becomes difficult, it is a type of opening the accessory winning port 1155 multiple times in which it is determined in advance to guide the user to the loss hole 1230c, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of the symbol. When it is assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the first advantage small hit which is a type that gives the same privilege as when the first big hit is won, and... Of the advantageous small hits, which is the type in which the above-mentioned prize winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball is guided to the V winning hole 1156, the rotating body 1236 operates as shown in FIG. 124(a). While being maintained in the state, the winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) performs the short opening operation a plurality of times, and the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 is performed while the short opening operation is performed. The second advantageous small hit, which is a type that gives the same privilege as when the second big hit is won, is prepared.

And, in the first special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141(b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the obtained symbol random number, the first big hit (obtained in the big hit game) The number of possible prizes is relatively small, but after the big hit game is played, only the 15R hour/hour big hit, which is always controlled in the time/short game state, is determined as the type.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141(c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, based on the value of the above-obtained symbol random number, the first disadvantage small hit, Either the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantage small hit is determined.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the probability is still lower than the winning probability of the big hit ((7/1200)×( 20/1000)), but there is a possibility that an advantageous small hit is determined as the type. Therefore, even when the small hit game on the first special symbol side is performed, there is a possibility that a big hit game will occur, so the winning character in the small hit game on the first special symbol side Each time the winning opening 1155 is opened, the player can be encouraged to win the prize winning opening 1155, and it is expected that the player is expected to be controlled to shift to the time saving gaming state after the big hit game is played. Will be able to.

Especially, in the small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, while the second disadvantaged small hit is obtained. In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained by the opening mode, so that the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as the expected effect. become.

Further, in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, only the first advantageous small hit can be determined as the advantageous small hit. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where a big hit (first big hit) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, and an advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained. Regardless of whether the big hit game is executed on the basis of a certain period of time after the big hit game is executed (for example, a period until the special symbol lottery is exhausted 100 times), a time saving game state is always generated. Will be able to

On the other hand, in the table on the side of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 141(a), among the 1200 kinds of values that can be acquired as the second winning/deciding random number, three kinds of values have been won in the jackpot. So that the 200 kinds of values match the small hitting judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 997 kinds of values match the losing judgment value indicating the above-mentioned deviation. The 1200 types of values that can be obtained as the second winning/deciding random numbers are associated with each other. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the probability that a jackpot is obtained as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/400, The probability that a small hit will be obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery will be set to 1/6.

If the value obtained as the second winning/deciding random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without a reach based on the value of the second reach random number obtained above. ..

In the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141(b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the obtained symbol random number, the second big hit (obtained in the big hit game) There are relatively many possible prizes, but only if you are won in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which the time saving function is not working), you are controlled to the time saving gaming state after the jackpot game is played. Only the 15R hour/hour big hit with the condition that it is decided to be decided as the type.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141(c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, only the second advantageous small hit is based on the value of the obtained symbol random number. Is decided as the type. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a big jackpot (second big jackpot) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, and an advantageous small jackpot (second advantageous small jackpot) is obtained. Even if the big hit game is executed based on either of them, the big hit game with which a relatively large number of prizes can be obtained is executed, but the normal game state (the game state in which the time saving function is not activated) It is possible to generate a time saving game state only for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the lottery for special symbols is exhausted 100 times) after a big hit game is played, when the game is won when ing.

As described above, in the case where the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, even if the game balls are won in the accessory winning hole 1155, all of those game balls are set in the V winning hole (specific area) 1156. A disadvantage small hit game is performed in which the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is opened/closed so as not to be distributed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, the above-mentioned accessory at the timing when the game ball which has already been launched and is in the winning waiting state is guided to the V winning opening 1156. An advantageous small hit game in which the winning opening 1155 is opened is played.

Therefore, if the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, the small hit game (specific area) 1156 is executed though the small hit game in which the prize winning opportunity is given by opening the accessory winning hole 1155 is performed. Since a game ball is not accepted and a big hit game is not generated, it can be said that it can be classified as a type of loss in a broad sense. Therefore, including such a disadvantage small hit, lottery results that have no possibility of generating a big hit game (or the big hit game only with a probability lower than the winning probability of the big hit set to an extremely low probability) The generic name of the lottery results (which cannot be generated) may be referred to as the “loss”.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, it is based on the mechanical lottery related to the distribution of the game balls between the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 and the general area (miss area). Although a small hit game is played, it is executed in a broad sense because it is determined that the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 to generate a big hit game. In a sense, it can be said that some can be classified as one type of big hit. Therefore, including such an advantageous small hit, if the game is properly advanced (for example, 100 game balls are sequentially hit to the right in one minute), a big hit game will be generated. (Or, if the game is progressing properly, the generic name of the lottery result that will generate the big hit game with a probability of more than 1/2 (the probability of generating the big hit game is higher) is called "winning". You may do it.

Then, when the special symbol lottery (step S311) on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag is performed in this way, then, as a process of step S312, a flag indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and a winning information command, respectively. set. At this time, a stop symbol is also determined according to the result of the special symbol lottery. After that, as the process of step S313, when the process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150), this process is ended.

The result of the special symbol lottery obtained in this variation start process (including the type of special symbol to be processed) is shown in FIG. 131 as the winning information command set in the process of step S312. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17).

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (step S311) and the like will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

In the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a flag indicating that the big hit is won. If is set (YES in step S401), the variation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the gaming state is selected (step S402), and if the flag showing that the small hit is won is set (step S403). YES), select a variation pattern table at the time of a small hit according to the type and the gaming state (step S404), and if the reach flag is set (YES at step S405), select the variation pattern table at reach. (Step S406), if the flag state indicates that the game is neither a big hit, a small hit, or a reach loss, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss that does not perform the reach effect) (at step S405) No), the variation pattern table at the time of losing is selected (step S407).

Then, the variation pattern is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number (first variation random number or second variation random number) on the side acquired in the variation start process (step S130) (step S408), A special pattern display device (first special design display device 1185 or second special design display device) on the side to be processed by setting a variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of starting the determined variation pattern The variable display of the special symbol displayed in 1186) is started (step S409). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern (step S410). As a result, fluctuation control is performed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186) and the effect display device 1115 only for the fluctuation time determined in this way. Then, after that, as the process of step S411, when the process flag is updated to “2” so that the process shifts to the changing process (step S170a), this process is ended.

The fluctuation pattern set by the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S409. .. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the result of the jackpot lottery is displayed on the basis of the change pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140. Display production will be performed.

By the way, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, of the big hit variation pattern table used in the process of step S402, the table on the first special symbol side, when in the normal gaming state In the normal big hit variation pattern table used, a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) for enlivening the display effect on the effect display device 1115 are stored in cooperation with the reach-miss variation pattern table. That is, in cooperation with the reach-miss variation pattern table, the above-mentioned “winning” expectation levels are made different for each variation pattern, and one of these variation patterns is selected in the processing of step S408a. Will be decided.

Further, in the variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment, of the small hit variation pattern table used in the process of step S404, when the table is on the first special symbol side and is in the normal gaming state. In the normal small hit variation pattern table used for, the first advantageous small hit is obtained regardless of the type of the small hit (first unfavorable small hit, second unfavorable small hit, first advantageous small hit). We are trying to make a specific performance pattern that makes us expect that.

According to such a configuration, when the small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the display effect having the specific effect pattern is ended regardless of the type. After that, it becomes possible to urge the player to hit right so that the game ball enters the accessory winning hole 1155. However, when the small hitting game is played according to the winning of the first disadvantaged small hit, it is immediately recognized from the opening mode that it is a "loss". On the other hand, when the small hit game according to the winning of the second disadvantage small hit is performed, the execution process of the small hit game itself functions as an expected effect until the halfway stage after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of the symbol. Therefore, the expectation of “winning” can be maintained for a long time.

[About changing process]
Next, the changing process (step S170) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

When the process flag indicates that the changing process (step S170) should be performed, as shown in FIG. 136, first, as the process of step S501, the change pattern setting process (step S150) is performed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation timer set in the processing of step S410 has become 0, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time set above has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the variation timer is not 0, that is, the variation time set above has not elapsed (NO in step S501), the variation step (step S170) is performed each time the variation step is performed. As the process of S531, the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S501, when it is determined that the fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, it is determined that the set fluctuation time has elapsed, the processing of steps S502 and S503. As a stop symbol that has already been determined (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) special symbol display device on the side to be processed (first special symbol display device) Display control for terminating the variable display by displaying on 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186) and decoration according to the stop symbol of the special symbol on the side to be processed on the effect display device 1115. A confirmation stop command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The definite stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the effect result in the same effect is definitely displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, at the time when various processes according to the result of the special symbol lottery are executed, this process is ended.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504), the process flag is updated to "5" to start the big hit game (step S506), and this process ends. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, the processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the small hit game (step S513), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504 and NO in step S511), first, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating (step S521). Then, when the time saving function is operating, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol consumed while the time saving function is operating has reached a predetermined upper limit value (step S522). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested while the time saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the time saving game state is satisfied, and the time saving function Will be stopped (step S523). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined that the special symbol is in a processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped so as to indicate that it is lost, and the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S524). ), and ends this processing. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol will be performed on condition that the reservation is exhausted in the process of step S301.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time saving game state, only the lottery on the second special symbol side can be continuously executed. With such a high probability, "winning (second advantageous small hit)" can be obtained. Therefore, normally, "winning (second advantageous small hit)" is immediately obtained and the big hit game on the second special symbol side occurs, so that the short-time gaming state is ended, and the digested special symbol It can be said that it is almost unlikely that the time saving game state is ended when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times).

[About the small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start processing (step S190) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start processing.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the small hit game start process (step S190), the main control MPU 4100a first measures the interval before the small hit game starts (small hit start interval timer) as the process of step S601. ) Is already set. As a result, if the small hit start interval timer is not set yet, the small hit start interval timer is set and the small hit start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S602 and S603 to start the pre-start interval of the small hit game. Set the hit interval start command.

Then, next, as the processing of step S604, when the control related to the rotation of the rotating body 1236 provided in the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 is performed, this processing is temporarily terminated. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery, the variation of the special symbol is terminated (the stop symbol appears) and is always constant. It is supposed that a motion (a fixed rotation mode) appears in the rotating body 1236. Therefore, in the process of step S604, a control structure is provided in which an execution opportunity is given each time the small hit game start process (step S190) is performed, and a variation of the special symbol each time the execution opportunity is given. Will be controlled to appear in the rotating body 1236 according to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hit start interval timer) after the end (the stop symbol appears).

The small hit interval start command set in the process of step S603 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the pre-start interval of the small hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

After the small hit start interval timer is set in this manner, it is determined that the small hit start interval timer has been set in the process of step S601 each time the interrupt process is performed. In the process of step S611, the small hit start interval timer is 0, that is, it is determined whether or not the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has elapsed. In the processing of step S611, as long as it is determined that the small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611). Each time the small hit game start process (step S190) is performed, the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S621.

However, while the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 in the process of step S621, the execution opportunity of the process of step S604 is given each time, and thus the variation of the special symbol ends. The movement according to the elapsed time (e.g., the value of the small hit start interval timer) after (the appearance of the stop symbol) appears in the rotating body 1236 each time. As will be described later, such movement of the rotating body 1236 (drive control) is continuously executed in the small hitting game process even after the small hitting game start process is completed, so that the special After the fluctuation of the symbol ends (the stop symbol appears), a constant movement (constant rotation mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236.

As a result of such processing, it is determined that the small hit start interval timer has become 0 in the processing of step S611, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has elapsed. Then, in order to execute the small hit game, the processing flag is updated to "4" (step S612), and at the time when the rotating body 1236 is controlled (step S604), this processing ends.

Regarding the small hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the small hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number). For example, when a disadvantageous small hit is obtained, a relatively short time is set (the expected value of the time length is relatively shortened), while an advantageous small hit is obtained. Sometimes, a relatively long time is set (the expected value of the time length is made relatively long), so that the advantageous small hit is obtained depending on the length of the small hit interval. Will be able to show.

Further, when a small hit is obtained in the time saving game state, the time saving function is maintained even in such a small hit interval, and the ball can easily enter the second starting opening 1153. If the length of the interval before the small hitting game is changed according to the type (type determined by the symbol random number), the ease of maintaining the second special symbol can be changed depending on the type of the small hitting symbol. It is also possible to do so.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at least as a pre-start interval period of the small hitting game on the second special symbol side in the time saving game state, the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 1153. For this reason, a long interval time of sufficient length is always adopted, and the number of second special symbol lottery reserves can be secured up to the upper limit value in this long interval time. That is, in this case, the second advantageous small hit game is performed while the reserved number of the second special symbol lottery is secured up to its upper limit value (4), and eventually the big hit game occurs to end the time saving game state. Since it will be done, the second special symbol lottery for 4 times secured up to the upper limit value of the hold is sequentially digested in the normal game state, with a high probability such as 1/6 "winning ( It is possible to provide a chance game within a hold, such as whether a "second advantageous small hit, big hit)" can be obtained.

In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to realize such an on-hold chance game, during the interval period before the start of the small hit game, not the prize winning port 1155 but the second starting port 1153. It is supposed that the control is performed so that the effect image that prompts the player to enter the game ball appears. According to such a configuration, prior to starting the jackpot game, it is possible to secure the number of the second special symbol lottery held up to its upper limit value, and of course, the second starting opening 1153 and the accessory winning opening/closing. Due to the positional relationship with the member 1221, it is possible to secure a game ball on the upper surface of the winning a prize winning opening/closing member 1221 that is in a winning waiting state.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

As shown in FIG. 138, in the small hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a first has, as the process of step S701, the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress. It is determined whether or not the small hit game execution flag indicating is in the ON state. As a result, if the small hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, the type of small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous, as the process of step S702, in order to start the control related to the execution of the small hit game. A small hit, a first disadvantaged small hit, and a second disadvantaged small hit) are set, and an opening timer for measuring the time required to execute control related to the opening pattern is set. Next, as the processing of steps S703 and S704, the small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the small hitting game is already in progress is turned on, and the small hitting start command is set. To do. Then, as the processing of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this processing is temporarily terminated.

As described above, for the drive control of the rotating body 1236 (step S705), the control content (step S604) in the small hitting game start process is executed as it is and the special symbol is changed. Control for operating the rotating body 1236 will be performed based on the elapsed time from the end (appearance of the stop symbol). As a result, after the variation of the special symbol ends (the stop symbol appears), a constant movement (a constant rotation mode) always appears in the rotating body 1236.

After the small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress in the process of step S701 every time the interrupt process is performed. As a result, in the processing of step S711, it is determined whether or not the accessory closing flag indicating that the condition for closing the accessory winning opening 1155 is satisfied is turned on, and the accessory closing flag is set. If it is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the accessory winning hole 1155 is satisfied in the processes of steps S712 and S713.

Here, in the process of step S712, it is determined whether or not the open timer is 0, that is, whether the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game has reached a predetermined upper limit time. In the process of step S713, it is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have won the accessory winning hole 1155 during the small hitting game has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10). Is judged.

Then, as a result of these processes, when it is determined that the open timer is not yet 0 and the total number of winning prizes does not reach the predetermined upper limit value (here, 10), first, as the process of step S714. The control according to the set release pattern is executed. As a result, unless the condition for closing the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening/closing movement of the prize winning opening/closing member 1221 is performed through the process of step S714 (sliding operation). ) Is updated (managed), and eventually the above-mentioned role is provided with an opening pattern according to the type of small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit). A small hitting game in which the article prize opening/closing member 1221 opens and closes is realized. The details of the opening pattern according to the type of small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit) will be described later.

After the control according to the opening pattern is executed in this way, as a process of step S715, whether or not the specific sensor 1239 for detecting that the game ball is received in the V winning opening (specific region) 1156 is turned on or not. To judge. As a result, if it is determined that the game ball is received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (the specific sensor 1239 is in the ON state), as the processing of step S716, the V winning opening during the small hit game ( The V history flag indicating that the specific area) 1156 has been accepted is turned on. Then, next, as the processing of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this processing is temporarily terminated.

If it is determined in step S715 that the specific sensor 1239 is not in the on state, the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed in step S705 without operating the V history flag in the on state. This process will be terminated once when is performed.

Such processing (steps S714 to S716, S705) is performed each time the interrupt processing is performed, unless the condition for closing the character winning opening 1155 (steps S712, S713) is satisfied, thereby opening/closing the character winning opening. While updating (managing) the movement of opening/closing the member 1221 and the movement of the rotation of the rotating body 1236 each time, it is possible to provide a game aiming at the opportunity of turning on the specific sensor 1239.

Then, as a result of repeating these processes (steps S714 to S716, S705), in the process of step S712, the open timer is 0, that is, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game is predetermined. It is determined that the upper limit time has been reached, or in the process of step S713, the total number of game balls that have won the accessory winning opening 1155 during the small hit game period is a predetermined upper limit value (here, When it is determined that the number of winning holes has reached 10), it is determined that the condition for closing the winning prize hole 1155 is satisfied, and each process (steps S721 to S723) for closing the winning prize hole 1155 is performed. Become.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first performs the control of closing the accessory winning opening 1155 by closing the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 as the process of step S721. Next, as the processing of steps S722 and S723, a post-closure interval timer that measures the time after the character prize opening 1155 is closed is set, and the condition for closing the character prize opening 1155 is satisfied. The accessory closing flag shown is operated to the ON state. As a result, a new game ball will not enter the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 in the small hitting game process.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when there is a game ball heading for the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 while the small hit game is being played, Until the closing condition is satisfied, the game ball is held at a position where it cannot be accepted by the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, and the holding is released after the closing condition of the accessory winning opening 1155 is satisfied. By doing so, it has a control (steps S604, 705) and a structure (see FIG. 120) that allow the game ball to be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156.

Therefore, the post-closure interval timer is set with a time longer than the time required for the held game ball to be accepted in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (step S722), and step S731. Until it is determined that the time has expired in the process of, the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress each time the interrupt process is performed (YES in step S701), and While it is determined that the condition for closing the article prize hole 1155 is satisfied (YES in step S711), the process of subtracting the timer value of the post-closure interval timer (step S732) and the V prize hole ( The process in which the V history flag is turned on (steps S715 and S716) on condition that the game ball is received in the specific area 1156 (steps S715 and S716) and the process related to the drive control of the rotating body 1236 are sequentially performed. It will be performed (step S705).

However, in this case, in the process of step S705, the control for causing the rotary body 1236 to perform a certain operation based on the elapsed time after the change of the special symbol ends (the stop symbol appears) is ended, As a control after the condition for closing the accessory winning hole 1155 is satisfied, the rotary body 1236 is moved to the state shown in FIG. 120(b) (the held game ball is moved to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156). The control for displacing the supply state) is performed.

Then, as a result of repeating these processes (steps S732, S715, S716, S705), when the interval timer after closing is up (YES in step S731), each process for ending the small hit game (step S741). -Steps S746 and S751) are performed.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a, first, if the time saving function is operating (YES in step S741), the upper limit is set in advance the number of times of variation of the special symbol consumed while the time saving function is operating. It is determined whether the value has been reached (step S742). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested while the time saving function is operating reaches the predetermined upper limit value, the time saving game state is ended. As soon as the conditions that should be met are satisfied, the time saving function is to be stopped, and if the final fluctuation is a symbol fluctuation according to the small hit, the time saving function is stopped at the timing when the small hit game has been exhausted. (Step S743). As a result, even after the small hit symbol is stopped, the short-time function will continue until the small hit game is completely digested, so it is preferable to hold the special symbol when the game is in the short-time game state. It can be maintained, but this will be described later.

After that, when it is determined that the V history flag is in the ON state (YES in step S744), it is determined that the game ball is received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hitting game process. In order to start the big hit game, the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S745), and various flags operated in the small hit game processing (small hit game execution flag, accessory closed flag, V history flag, etc.) ) Is turned off (step S746), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V history flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S744), it is determined that the game ball has not been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hitting game process. While updating the processing flag to "0" (step S751), various flags operated in the small hitting game processing (small hitting game execution flag, accessory closing flag, V history flag, etc.) are turned off. At this point (step S746), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol will be performed on condition that the reservation is exhausted in the process of step S301.

[About the big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing (step S230) executed when the processing flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start processing.

As shown in FIG. 139, in the big hit game start process (step S230), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a timer (big hit start interval timer) for measuring the pre-start interval of the big hit game as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in the completed state. As a result, if the big hit start interval timer is not set yet, the condition device is activated as the process of step S802, and if the time saving function is activated as the processes of steps S803 and S804. (YES in step S803), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparations have been made, the jackpot start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S805 and S806 in order to start the pre-start interval of the jackpot game, and this processing is performed when the jackpot interval start command is set. It will end once.

The big hit interval start command set in the process of step S806 is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect in the pre-start interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

That is, after the jackpot start interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the jackpot start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S801 each time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next step S811. In this process, it is determined whether or not the big hit start interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. In the process of step S811, the jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S811), Each time the big hit game start process (step S230) is performed, the big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S811, the big hit start interval timer becomes 0, that is, when it is determined that the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed, In order to execute the big hit game, when the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S812), this processing ends.

Regarding the big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the kind of big hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number).

[About big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

As shown in FIG. 140, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the big hit game execution flag is on. Then, as a result, if the big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, in order to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the second attacker device 2150, as a process of step S902, an opening mode according to the type of big hit (Number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) is set.

As described above, in this embodiment, in addition to the fact that only the 15R hour short and big hits are prepared as the kind of big hit, when the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game, Since the round game is to generate a big hit game that is played 15 times, "15 times" is always set as the number of rounds in the process of step S902. However, regarding the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round, the case of the first special symbol side (big hit game according to the winning of the first big hit) and the case of the second special symbol side (second big hit By setting in a different mode with the big hit game according to the winning), the big hit game on the second special symbol side (the big hit game according to the winning of the second big hit) will be able to win more prizes. I have to.

More specifically, when the big hit game according to the lottery result (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) on the first special symbol side is played, an award that can obtain approximately 400 game balls is given. While the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined depending on the mode of being awarded, the jackpot game according to the lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit) on the second special symbol side In this case, the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined in a manner in which an award that can obtain approximately 2000 game balls is given.

After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, as the processing of steps S903 and S904, the big hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress is turned on. At the same time, when the big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

That is, after the big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress in the processing of step S901 each time the interrupt processing is performed. As a result, in the processing of the next step S911, it is determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted. Then, in the processing of this step S911, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been exhausted yet, that is, it is in the middle stage of the control relating to the execution of the big hit game (NO in step S911). Each time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, as the process of step S912, the control according to the set opening pattern is executed. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement (including the interval between rounds) related to the opening and closing of the special winning opening/closing member 1203 is updated (managed) through the process of step S912. As a result, a big hit game in which the special winning opening opening/closing member 1203 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit comes to be realized.

Then, in the process of the above step S911, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been exhausted, that is, all the controls related to the execution of the jackpot game are completed, while such control is being performed. (YES in step S911), each process (step S921, step S922, step S931, step S941, step S942) for generating the end interval of the big hit game is performed.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (big hit end interval timer) for measuring the end interval of the big hit game has been set (step S921). As a result, if the big hit end interval timer is not set yet, the big hit end interval timer is set and the big hit interval end command is issued as the processing of steps S941 and S942 in order to start the end interval of the big hit game. At the time of setting, this process will be ended once.

The big hit interval end command set in the process of step S942 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

That is, after the big hit end interval timer is set in this way, it is determined that the big hit end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S921 each time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next step S922. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not the big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has elapsed. Then, in the processing of step S922, as long as it is determined that the jackpot end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S922), Each time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, the big hit end interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S931.

Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S922, the big hit end interval timer becomes 0, that is, when it is determined that the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has passed, Each process (step S923 to step S928) for ending the big hit game will be performed.

That is, the main control MPU 4100a first, as the process of step S923, operates the big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery satisfies the condition for operating the time saving function (YES in step S924), the time saving function is operated to control the shift to the time saving game state (step S925). ).

After the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S926), and when the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S927), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol will be performed on condition that the reservation is exhausted in the process of step S301.

According to such a big hit game process, until the round game is judged to have reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step S911, the corresponding special winning opening 1154 is opened according to the type of the big hit ( With step S912), the game is repeatedly opened, and eventually the player can obtain the prize according to the type of the big hit.

[About the small hit game]
FIG. 142 is a state in which the character winning port 1155 is opened when the small hit game (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit, first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit) is performed, and the winning prize is obtained. 9 is a time chart showing an example of the relationship with the operating state of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in the inner region of the mouth 1155. The control shown in FIG. 142 is executed in the form of being controlled by the main control MPU 4100a every 4 ms by the small hit game process (see FIG. 138).

As described above, in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to the present embodiment, the receiving position of the receiving portion 1236a is upward (FIG. 124(a)), and the releasing position of the receiving portion 1236a is rightward. (Fig. 124(b)) is rotatable. Then, in the state where the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position, only the first supplied game ball of the game balls received in the winning a prize winning opening 1155 is held in the receiving portion 1236a, and other game balls are held. Is supplied to the lost hole 1230c. Then, when the rotating body 1236 is rotated to the discharging position, the held game ball is discharged from the rotating body 1236 to be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. On the other hand, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment receives any of the game balls received in the accessory winning port 1155 when the receiving portion 1236a is in the discharge position facing right. It also has a function of supplying the game ball to the lose hole 1230c so that the game ball is not received in the V winning opening 1156 without being held by the portion 1236a.

In this regard, in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142(e), from the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of small hit appears, regardless of the type of small hit. It rotates so that a certain motion appears. It should be noted that such an operation is realized by performing the processing of step S604 and the processing of step S705 described above each time the interrupt processing is performed.

Further, as described above, in the special downflow passage according to the present embodiment, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, at least two on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. It is formed with a structure that allows the above-mentioned (2, 3) game balls to exist in a state waiting for a prize to enter the prize winning slot 1155.

[About the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained]
As shown in FIG. 142(d), while the structure of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 and the special flow-down passage is realized, the second advantageous small hit (second special symbol side lottery) In the small hit game when the game is obtained, first, until a plurality of game balls are placed in the winning waiting state on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) which is closed by the player's right-handed stroke. At a timing which is after the timing when the time required for arriving arrives and which is slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the accommodation position to the discharge position, Control for sliding the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state is performed.

However, here, the timing t2 is set to arrive at a time that is much shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning port 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning a prize waiting state is set in the accessory winning port 1155. Although a plurality of game balls that are present can be accepted at once in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the storage position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the hole 1230c. And will be discharged.

The reason why such a high speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated by the drive of the V prize solenoid 1232, not the motor, and the winning of the winning role is achieved. This is because the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the number of game balls (game balls in the prize-waiting state) on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is equal to the number of game balls. Regardless of the amount, each time the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is opened, it is formed with a structure capable of quickly and completely entering the inside area of the accessory winning opening 1155. As I did. At this point, at the timing t2, after the arrival of the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of a small hit appears, waiting for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a). After that, a sliding operation (opening) is performed for a very short time (0.12 seconds) required for a plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to collectively enter the winning a prize opening 1155. The operation is controlled.

According to the control at such a timing t2, all of the game balls are lost holes even though the plurality of game balls waiting for winning are put into the winning a prize winning opening 1155 in an extremely short opening time. Since it is distributed to 1230c and discharged, the game ball received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is the above V winning hole without wasting the open time (1.8 seconds at maximum) of the small hit game. The probability of being accepted by 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) can be suitably reduced.

Moreover, according to such control, basically, only the game balls that are already in the winning waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). It is possible to win a prize only when the award winning opening 1155 is opened. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the winning a prize slot 1155, the probability of being accepted by the V winning slot 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) Also, it will be possible to control this appropriately.

Then, after the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed in this way, wait for the timing t3 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position. Then, control is performed to slide the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state again for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds).

Here, as is clear from FIGS. 142(d) and 142(e), by the time the timing t3 arrives, at least the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is at least. Since two or more (2, 3) game balls are present in a prize-waiting state, these game balls are immediately batched into the character prize opening 1155 by the sliding movement of the character prize opening/closing member 1221. And will be accepted. Moreover, at the timing t3, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the discharging position to the containing position, any one of the game balls collectively received in the accessory winning port 1155 is It is always held by the receiving portion 1236a. The game ball held in this way is discharged from the rotating body 1236 at the timing t4 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the housed position to the discharge position. It will be accepted to 1156.

However, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142(d), a plurality of bonus winning opening/closing members 1221 are provided within the period of timings t1 to t4. Control for maintaining the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) for a time required to supply the game balls (here, three or more), and opening the winning prize winning opening/closing member 1221. The control of sliding operation for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state is alternately performed five times.

That is, in this case, within the period of the timings t1 to t4, every time the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is slid (opened) from the closed state to the opened state for a very short time (0.12 seconds), a few times. The individual game balls will be accepted by the prize winning slot 1155. Then, in view of such an acceptance situation, normally, the small hit game (when the second advantageous small hit is obtained when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed. In the small hit game, the upper limit value (up to 10) of the game balls that can be won is reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

In this respect, when the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won is reached at the time when the fourth or fifth sliding operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the opening/closing control of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is performed. In addition to being ended (FIG. 138: Step S721), the control for causing a constant motion to appear on the rotating body 1236 based on the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (elapsed time from timing t1) ends. Instead of this, control is performed to displace the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position. Thereby, although illustration is omitted, various controls concerning the small hit game (small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) are ended before the timing t4 arrives, and by extension, The big hit game according to the game ball being received in the V winning opening 1156 can be executed.

Further, when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in the storage position holds the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a, the held game ball can be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. Although it is decided, all of the game balls received in the accessory winning hole 1155 are distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged. According to such a configuration, for example, in the period of timing t3 to t4, while the game ball is surely supplied to the V winning opening 1156 in the future, the game entered in the accessory winning opening 1155. The probability that the ball will be distributed to the V winning opening 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) can be appropriately reduced.

However, even in the case of a small hit game when such a second advantageous small hit is obtained, if the right hit by the player is not continued, the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won (maximum Timing t4 arrives without reaching 10), and the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) reaches a predetermined upper limit time. (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

That is, in this case, in addition to the opening/closing control of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 being terminated when the upper limit time is reached (FIG. 138: step S721), the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (timing t1) The control for causing the rotary body 1236 to perform a constant operation based on the elapsed time) is ended, and instead, the rotary body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the discharge position. Control will be performed. As a result, the big hit game can be executed if there is a game ball accepted to the V winning opening 1156, whereas the big hit game is not executed if there is no game ball accepted to the V winning opening 1156. The next change of special symbols will be made.

In this way, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, as long as the player continues to hit right, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time The jackpot game that is advantageous to the player by surely supplying any one of many game balls to the V winning opening 1156 while appropriately reducing the probability (probability of mechanical lottery) accepted in the V winning opening 1156. Will be able to start (corresponding to "winning").

Further, the accessory winning port 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) which is shorter than the interval (0.6 seconds) at which the game balls are fired by the hitting ball firing device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500. While performing an operation (a short opening operation in which the expected value of winning is less than one in calculation), a plurality of game balls are moved to the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 each time the short opening operation appears. I am trying to make it possible to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of game balls to be won per unit time when the accessory winning port 1155 is opened, and such excellent winning performance suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game. Can be done.

In this way, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, there is a winning prize opening/closing member 1221( among the plurality of game balls which are in the winning waiting state during the relatively long closing interval. By performing the short opening operation by the door portion 1221a) a plurality of times, the total opening time (0.6 seconds) of the award winning port 1155 is itself short, but many (10 or more) game balls are in the internal area. It is supposed to be able to enter. However, in order to set the machine lottery probability to a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less, as shown in FIG. 142(e), the player waits for the game ball to win at the timing t2 guided to the lost hole 1230. The accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is opened for a short period from the closed state to the opened state so that the state is released, or the rotating body 1236 is in the operating state (accommodating state shown in FIG. While being maintained at the position) (at timings t3 to t4), the short opening operation by the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times.

According to such a configuration, when a lot (10 or more) of game balls are allowed to enter the internal area when the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened, the V winning hole 1156 is reached. The game ball to be guided is limited to the game ball first supplied to the rotating body 1236 while the rotating body 1236 is maintained in the operating state (storage position) shown in FIG. 124(a). Like That is, in this case, even if the player's launch of the game ball is delayed, at least one game ball enters the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155 at the timings t3 to t4. For example, it is possible to finally receive the V winning opening 1156. On the other hand, each of the other game balls different from the game ball initially supplied to the rotating body 1236 will be guided to the missing hole 1230, so that one small hit game (more than one) While the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156 while the short opening operation by the time is performed, the machine lottery probability is maintained at a low probability value of about 1/10 or less. Will be able to.

[About the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142(a), when the first disadvantage small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) is obtained, the small hit game is also closed by first right-handed by the player. It is after the timing when the time required until a plurality of game balls are supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the state comes and the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. At a timing slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 at which the character rotates from the accommodation position to the discharge position, control for sliding the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state is performed.

Also, similarly, in this sliding operation, the timing t2 arrives at a time that is much shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning port 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. It is said that. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning a prize waiting state is set in the accessory winning port 1155. Although a plurality of game balls that are present can be accepted at once in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the storage position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the hole 1230c. And will be discharged.

However, in the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, the time during which the new game ball can be supplied during the sliding operation as the time for the sliding operation (the time slightly longer than the firing interval ( 0.62 seconds)) is adopted as a result of this, in addition to the plurality of game balls (game balls waiting for winning) on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. The game balls newly supplied can also be won in the accessory winning port 1155.

Moreover, in the small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, after such a slide operation for 0.62 seconds is completed, the small hit game (without sliding operation is performed again) The small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained) reaches the predetermined upper limit time (time-out of the above-mentioned open timer) after the start of the small hit game (FIG. 138: (YES in step S712).

In this way, in the small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls into the accessory winning hole 1155, but all of the game balls are the above V winning holes. It will not be accepted by the 1156. Therefore, there is no possibility that the big hit game can be executed due to this small hit game (corresponding to "defeat").

[About each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit, the first advantage small hit is obtained]
In the above-mentioned small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, while the second disadvantaged small hit is obtained. In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by the opening mode, and the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as the expected performance. Is becoming

That is, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) and the first advantageous small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) are obtained, FIG. 142(b), ( As shown in c), from timing t1 to timing t8, which will be described later, operations for closing and opening the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 are performed in the same or similar manner.

The first operation is similar to other small hit games, first, until a plurality of game balls are supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) that is closed by the player's right hit. At a timing which is after the timing when the time required for arriving arrives and which is slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the accommodation position to the discharge position, Control for sliding the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) is performed.

Also, here, similarly, as for the timing of this sliding operation, the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning hole 1155 by the sliding operation to reach the rotating body 1236 is much shorter than the above time. The timing t2 is set to arrive. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning a prize waiting state is set in the accessory winning port 1155. Although a plurality of game balls that are present can be accepted at once in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the storage position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the hole 1230c. And will be discharged.

The reason why such a high speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated by the drive of the V prize solenoid 1232, not the motor, and the winning of the winning role is achieved. This is because the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236.

However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the timing t3 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the accommodation position comes. In the period from when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated so as to return from the housed position to the released position until the timing t4 arrives, the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the opened state. It does not slide down. Therefore, an opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus an opportunity to be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. The control related to the operation after the timing t4 is performed.

That is, first, at a timing t4 when a relatively long closing interval (11.4 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are in the prize-waiting state are opened for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to collectively enter into 1155, by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the discharge position, All of these game balls are distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged.

On the other hand, at timing t5 when 6.5 seconds have passed from timing t4, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated from the discharge position to the storage position, and at the same time 2.5 seconds from this timing 5 At the timing t6 when the time has elapsed, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated again from the storage position to the discharge position.

However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantaged small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the opened state even within the period of the timing t5 to t6. It does not slide. Therefore, an opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus an opportunity to be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to the operation after the timing t6 will be performed.

That is, first, even at a timing t6 when a relatively long closing interval (8.88 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are in the prize-waiting state can be opened for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to collectively enter into 1155, by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the discharge position, All of these game balls are distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged.

On the other hand, at the timing t7 when 6.5 seconds have passed from the timing t6, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position, and at the same time, 2.5 seconds from the timing t7. At the timing t8 when the time elapses, the rotator (sorting device) 1236 rotates again from the storage position to the discharge position.

However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the open state even within the period of timing t7 to t8. It does not slide. Therefore, an opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus an opportunity to be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) has not yet been provided. Control related to the operation after the timing t8 will be performed.

In this way, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit and the first advantageous small hit are obtained, a plurality of game balls from the appearance of the stop symbol at the timing t1 to the arrival of the timing t8. Control for maintaining the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) for a sufficient time for the winning prize waiting state, and for a very short time (0. The control of sliding operation (opening operation) for 12 seconds) is repeated a plurality of times.

According to such a configuration, each time a very short sliding operation (opening operation) is performed, it is possible to insert a plurality of game balls in the prize waiting state into the accessory winning port 1155. All of these sliding operations (opening operations) are performed with respect to the operating state of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 that performs a constant motion after the stop symbol appears at the timing t1, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. The timing when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the accommodation position (more accurately, when the game ball that has entered the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a, the receiving portion 1236a is in the accommodation position. It is aimed at non-time).

That is, in the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, from the appearance of the stop symbol at the timing t1 to the arrival of the timing t8. In the meanwhile, all the game balls that have entered the accessory winning hole 1155 are allotted to the loss holes 1230c so that the reward cannot be determined. (Approximation). As a result, the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as an expected effect that allows the user to be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit has been obtained (timings t1 to t8).

In addition, in such a relatively long period of timings t1 to t8, the expected display that allows the effect display device 1115 to be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit may be obtained may be performed.

That is, as described above, in the period of timings t1 to t8, although a game in which a large number of game balls are won is provided to the accessory winning port 1155, the closing interval is relatively long. Then, the time when the winning a prize winning opening 1155 is opened is a relatively short time (more accurately, a short period (0.12 seconds) enough to win a game ball that has already been fired). It is controlled. Therefore, if a predetermined effect (expected effect capable of recognizing the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained) is performed during such a period of timings t1 to t8, the accessory winning hole 1155. Since it becomes easy to concentrate on the effect during the closed state (closed interval) for a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game.

Furthermore, in the period of timings t1 to t8, the closing interval that takes a relatively long time, and the game ball that is in a state of waiting for the entry prize, which is a relatively short time, enter the internal area of the award winning port 1155. And a short opening period that allows entry are repeated, so there is less tension during the closing interval (expectation that you can be aware of the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small hit). (Production) is basically appearing, it becomes possible to regularly generate a game production with a high sense of tension as to whether or not a game ball is accepted in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. As a result, this also makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

However, as shown in FIGS. 142(b) and 142(c), when the timing t8 comes, the small hit game and the first advantageous small hit when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained are obtained. Of the small hit games at this time, only when the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained is performed, the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 is for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds). From the sliding operation (opening operation), recognize whether the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained or the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained It will be possible.

In addition, the sliding operation (opening operation) at the timing t8 is also the same as in the case so far, in which a plurality of game balls that are in the prize waiting state are put in the winning a prize winning opening 1155 with an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to enter the balls at once, when these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the discharge position. Are all distributed to the loss hole 1230c and are discharged.

Then, in the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained, it is possible to win the prize when the sliding operation (opening operation) is performed for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) at the timing t8. When the upper limit value of the game ball (maximum 10 in the small hit game) is reached, or the above-mentioned release timer times out at a predetermined timing thereafter (FIG. 138: YES in step S712), the above V winning The game ball is ended without being accepted in the mouth 1156. Therefore, there is no possibility that the big hit game can be executed due to the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained (corresponding to "losing").

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142(c), in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the game balls are played for the time sufficient for the plurality of game balls to be in the winning waiting state. While the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is maintained in the closed state (closing interval), wait for the timing t9 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position. Thus, the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is slid (opened) for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds).

That is, in this case, if right-handing is continued, at least two (2,3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) that is closed. , The slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9. As a result, regardless of the number of game balls waiting for winning, the game balls can be immediately received in a batch at the prize winning opening 1155, and one of the game balls is It is always held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in the storage position.

Then, after this, at the timing t10, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) reaches the predetermined upper limit time (FIG. 138: step (YES in S712), control for displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the housed position to the discharge position is performed. As a result, the big hit game can be executed in response to the game ball being received in the V winning opening 1156.

However, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142(c), within the period of timings t1 to t9, a plurality of bonus winning opening/closing members 1221 are provided. Control for maintaining the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) for a time required to supply the game balls (here, three or more), and opening the winning prize winning opening/closing member 1221. The control of sliding operation for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state is alternately performed four times.

That is, in this case, within each of the timings t1 to t9, every time the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is slid (opened) from the closed state to the opened state for a very short time (0.12 seconds), a few times. The individual game balls will be accepted by the prize winning slot 1155. In view of such an acceptance situation, a prize is awarded in the small hit game (small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) at the time when the sliding operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9. There is a possibility that the upper limit value (up to 10) of the allowed game balls will be reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

In this respect, when the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won is reached at the time when the slide operation (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed, the opening/closing control of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is ended. In addition to that (FIG. 138: Step S721), the control for causing the rotary body 1236 to perform a certain operation based on the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (the elapsed time from the timing t1) is terminated. Instead of this, control is performed to displace the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the accommodation position to the discharge position. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls related to the small hitting game are ended before the timing t10 arrives, and thus a big hit corresponding to the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. The game becomes executable.

However, in the small hit game when an advantageous small hit is obtained, an opportunity for the game ball to be held in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156). Before the timing at which the chance of being distributed is given, the upper limit value (up to 10) of the game balls that can be won in the small hit game is reached, and the V winning opening (specific area) It is required not to end the small hit game without being assigned to 1156.

For example, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the maximum three prize balls can be put in the prize waiting state, and the character prize opening 1155 is opened for a short time three times. After that, at timing t9, control is performed to open the accessory winning port 1155 for a short time so that the game ball is held in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. That is, in this case, before the timing t9 arrives, only nine game balls less than the upper limit value (maximum of 10) can be won in the winning a prize slot 1155, so that the V winning slot (specific The small hit game does not end without being allocated to the area 1156.

In this way, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time The jackpot game that is advantageous to the player by surely supplying any one of many game balls to the V winning opening 1156 while appropriately reducing the probability (probability of mechanical lottery) accepted in the V winning opening 1156. Will be able to start (corresponding to "winning").

Further, in both the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is used. A short opening operation in which the character prize winning port 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) that is less than the interval between game ball firings (0.6 seconds) (calculated that the expected value to win is less than one). Each time the short opening operation appears, for each of the plurality of game balls that have already been launched and are in a prize-waiting state, they are moved to the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155. I am trying to make it possible to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of game balls to be won per unit time when the accessory winning port 1155 is opened, and such excellent winning performance suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game. Can be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, "basically, the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) already exists in the winning waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area). It is possible to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155 by adopting a configuration such that only the game ball can win the prize only when the prize winning hole 1155 is opened. As described above, it is possible to do so. In this respect, in each of the above-mentioned small hit games, by utilizing such accurate control performance, the accessory prize winning opening 1155 is guided at the timing when the game ball in the prize waiting state is guided to the V winning entrance 1156. It is possible to selectively use the control for opening the state and the control for opening the accessory winning port 1155 at the timing when the game ball in the prize waiting state is guided to the losing hole 1230c. We are trying to realize the playability that the small hit game should bear.

Further, as described above, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)) according to the present embodiment, the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a). With a structure in which the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface is controlled so as not to exceed "L/2T", each time the character prize opening 1155 is opened, the character prize is won in advance. The mouth opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is maintained as a closed state (closed interval) for a time (at least 1.2 seconds or more) required to supply a plurality of game balls. As a result, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two (2,3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) that is closed. Will be able to exist as.

Further, in this way, since it becomes possible to play such that at least two or more game balls T are habitually present in the specific rolling area (the upper surface of the character prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a)), the character object Every time the winning opening/closing member 1221 is opened, a plurality of game balls can win, and thus excellent winning performance can be realized, thereby giving a sense of speed to the winning situation at the accessory winning opening 1155. Will be able to.

Further, as described above, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, all the game balls in the winning waiting state have the winning combination. The position at which the game ball that has entered the internal area is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 (relative to the number of game balls that can be won), rather than the total ball entry time required to enter the internal area of the article winning hole 1155. A plurality of game balls are provided each time the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is opened, while an internal passage is provided in which the time required to reach the upper limit value determination point) becomes longer. Since it is possible to win, it becomes possible to actively generate overflow winnings against the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won, and realize dynamic winning performance and award winning performance exceeding the set value You will be able to.

By positively generating such an overflow prize, the number of game balls that exceeds the upper limit value (up to 10) of the game balls that can be won in the small hit game is increased to 1155. When it becomes possible to regularly enter the inner area of the game, and due to such excellent winning performance, it is always necessary to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 in the regulation for each small hit game described above. Even in this case, the machine lottery probability can be set lower than about 1/10.

Moreover, as described above, according to each of the small hit games (small hit games shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)) according to the present embodiment, the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is A direction (backward direction) that is perpendicular to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls so that a plurality of game balls waiting for winning on the top surface spill into the prize winning opening 1155 almost at the same time. It is supposed that it slides, and the structure for accepting all the game balls that are waiting for winning in an extremely short time is provided, and the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is opened. Each time it is released, the opening time is adopted to be significantly shorter (less than half, 0.12 seconds), than the interval between game balls being shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 (0.6 seconds). I am going to do it.

According to such a configuration, in calculation, a short opening operation is performed in which the expected value of winning is less than one, but each time the short opening operation occurs, a predetermined closing interval time elapses. Since at least two or more game balls T that are in a prize-waiting state can be made to enter the internal area of the character prize winning opening 1155 almost at the same time, It becomes possible to dramatically increase the number of winnings of the game ball T, and in the small hitting game in which the upper limit time is set, the opening time (up to 1.8 seconds) is not wasted and a large amount of it is consumed. You will be able to win a game ball

Furthermore, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142(a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, such a short opening operation is performed by the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. The timing when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the accommodation position (more accurately, when the game ball that has entered the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a, the receiving portion 1236a is in the accommodation position. It is supposed to appear with the aim of (no timing). Or, when the short opening operation is performed when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is in the accommodation position, the above-mentioned opening timer is timed up or the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won. Unless either condition is reached (maximum 10 in the small hit game), the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is not displaced to the discharge position. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably reduce the probability that the game ball received in the winning a prize slot 1155 will be accepted in the V winning slot 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not the motor but the V winning solenoid 1232 is driven to realize high-speed rotation by the rotating body 1236, whereby the game ball received in the winning a prize slot 1155. The rotor 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required to reach the rotor 1236. Therefore, a short opening operation of the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed at a timing (for example, timing t4, t6, t8, etc.) at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the release position. In the case of performing it, it becomes possible to position the short opening operation as an operation of not winning the prize winning hole 1155. In addition, at a timing (for example, timing t3, t9, etc.) at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the discharge position to the storage position, a short opening operation of the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed. In this case, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation for winning the prize winning port 1155.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned excellent winning performance in the case where a small hit (advantageous small hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the point is:
-The number of game balls that can be made to exist on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state as a prize-waiting state is "N (in this embodiment, a maximum of 3)",
When the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is opened, the upper limit number of winning game balls set to "X (this implementation)" is allowed to enter the inner area of the character prize opening 1155. In the form of ", 10 pieces)", and the time of the firing interval of the game ball is "Y (0.6 seconds in this embodiment)".
In this case, the time set value allowed as the operation time of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the open state is shorter than "XY (6 seconds in this embodiment)". Is set to T (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). Then, on this, the operation to the open state by the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is "X/N (in this embodiment, it is the smallest integer larger than "10/3", which is 4). It is possible to maintain the game ball in the above-mentioned prize-waiting state for each operation mode when executing the operation in Z times (5 times in this embodiment) more than once By setting the short opening time among the above, the total of the short opening times does not exceed the T time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment), but the above X pieces (in this embodiment, It is possible to perform opening optimization control for opening the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) so that 10 game balls can enter the inside area of the winning a prize opening 1155. Required to do so.

According to such a configuration, the operation of opening the prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the open state is performed Z times (in this embodiment, in a short opening time (0.12 seconds in this embodiment)). In each case, the game balls (up to three in this embodiment) that are in a prize-waiting state will enter the internal area each time the game is divided into five times. The total of time does not exceed the above-mentioned T time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment), but the above “X” (10 in this embodiment) game balls are placed inside the accessory winning hole 1155. It becomes possible to enter the area, and such excellent winning performance can suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

Therefore, the number of game balls that can be habitually present on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state as a prize waiting state does not necessarily have to be two or more (two or three). .. For example, even when a configuration in which at least one or more game balls are placed in a winning state on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state is adopted, the character prize opening/closing member 1221 is used. As long as the game (continuation of the right-handed game) is maintained so that the state (game waiting state) in which the game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the (door 1221a), a certain distribution The game ball enters the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155 at an accurate timing when it is guided to the V winning opening 1156 by the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 performing the operation (see FIG. 142(e)). Therefore, it is possible to start the big hit game according to the acceptance into the V winning opening 1156 (big hit control). That is, in this case, the winning rate opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) has a structure in which the maximum speed of the game ball on the upper surface does not exceed "L/T".

Even if such a configuration is adopted (at least one or more game balls are placed in the winning state on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state), basically, It is short enough that only the game balls that are already in a prize-waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the bonus winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door 1221a) can enter the internal area of the bonus winning opening 1155. It is possible to operate the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state for a time period (a short time period in which the winning of a game ball that is not in the prize waiting state is refused). It is more desirable to allow more accurate control of the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the bonus winning hole 1155.

In addition, this is also suitable for the machine lottery probability in the case of adopting such a configuration (at least one or more game balls are placed in the winning waiting state on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state). It is possible to set with a low probability value of "1/10" or less.

That is, in performing the opening control of the accessory winning port 1155 by dividing into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time,
-As the predetermined closing interval time, a time longer than one firing interval and shorter than two firing intervals (for example, 0.66 seconds) is adopted, and as the short opening time, The time required for the game balls in the prize-winning state to spill into the prize winning opening 1155 by the sliding motion of the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0. If a control such as adopting (12 seconds) is performed, a short opening operation will appear each time the game balls that are sequentially fired are placed in the winning waiting state at the predetermined closing interval time. That is, in this case, even if the short opening operation is shorter than the firing interval (the expected value to win the prize is less than one in the calculation), the short waiting operation is waited every time the short opening operation is repeated 10 times. One (rarely two) game balls will be won, and by allowing only one of these game balls to be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the machine lottery probability is approximately "1/10 ( It becomes possible to set it to "less than 1/10").

Furthermore, in the case where the opening control of the accessory winning port 1155 can be executed by dividing it into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time, instead of the configuration of (B), (B) If an internal passage is provided in which the time required for the game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 is longer than the time of the firing interval, 10 Even when the tenth game ball enters the internal area of the winning a prize hole 1155 when the short opening operation appears, the tenth gaming ball is detected by the winning a prize sensor 1224. The eleventh game ball can enter the internal area of the bonus winning port 1155 by the eleventh short opening operation before reaching the position. That is, in this case, it is possible to win the prize even if a configuration such as "at least one or more game balls are placed in the winning waiting state on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 in the closed state" is adopted. It becomes possible to positively generate the overflow prize for the upper limit value of the game ball (up to 10 in the small hit game).

In addition, various structures of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) and various controls in the small hitting game according to this embodiment are applied to the structure of the large winning prize opening/closing member 1203 and the control in the big hitting game, respectively. You may do so. That is, in this case, a game ball is regularly present on the upper surface of the big winning opening opening/closing member 1203 in a closed state as a prize waiting state, or a game ball per unit time when the big winning opening 1154 is in an open state. To dramatically increase the number of winnings, to give a sense of speed to the winning situation at the big winning opening 1154, and to actively generate overflow winnings against the upper limit of the game balls that can be won in the jackpot game. It becomes possible to obtain excellent effects such as, etc. in the jackpot game.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball is received in the first starting port 1152, the first special symbol side lottery is performed, but in the first special symbol side lottery The probability that the "winning" is obtained by the big hit is higher than the probability that the "winning" is obtained by the small win. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function does not operate (normal gaming state), normally, when the big hit is won according to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 1152, the big hit game is performed, and by extension, the time saving function. Will be controlled to move to a game state (time saving game state) in which is operated.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the gaming state in which the time saving function does not operate (normal gaming state), the game ball cannot be received in the second starting opening 1153 regardless of the result of the ordinary lottery. What is possessed is as described above. According to such a structure, the lottery on the second special symbol side that has been put on hold when the game state in which the time saving function operates (time saving game state) is exhausted when in the time saving game state. Alternatively, it will be digested only under either condition of being carried over during the transition control to the normal game state and being digested in the normal game state.

That is, in this case, unless the "winning" is obtained in the lottery on the first special symbol side in the normal game state, the time saving game state does not occur, and the lottery on the second special symbol side is not performed. Therefore, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be positioned as a comparatively rare event, and the lottery content can be set to an extremely advantageous game condition.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the jackpot game according to the result of the lottery on the first special symbol side, the time saving over the period until the special symbol lottery is exhausted 100 times While the game state can be continued, in the lottery on the second special symbol side, the second advantageous small hit is obtained with a probability of about 1/6. Further, in the time saving game state, since it is possible to continuously execute only the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, when the time saving game state is controlled, the lottery of the special symbol is usually 100. The second advantageous small hit will be obtained by the lottery on the side of the second special symbol before it is exhausted.

Then, in the small hit game corresponding to the second advantageous small hit being obtained, as long as the player continuously hits the right side, many game balls can be played in a short opening time. It is possible to insert the ball into the winning hole 1155, and to supply any one of many game balls to the V winning hole 1156 without fail and to supply the other game balls to the losing hole 1230c. This is as described above (see FIG. 142(c)). In other words, in this case, the probability of accepting the V prize hole 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) when a game ball enters the prize hole 1155 (probability of mechanical lottery) is appropriately reduced, while the probability of winning the prize hole 1155 is increased. By entering the game ball, it becomes possible to generate a jackpot game which is advantageous to the player. However, as described above, after the big hit game corresponding to the lottery on the second special symbol side in the time saving game state, after the big hit game is performed, the time saving function does not operate (normal game state) is controlled. It is like this.

According to such a configuration, at the time when the big hit game corresponding to the lottery on the first special symbol side is performed in the normal game state, the time saving game state occurs, and the second advantage in this time saving game state It is almost confirmed that the big hit game will be played again by getting the small hit, and that the normal game state will be controlled after the big hit game is played again, and so on. If you can get the "winning" in the lottery on the second special symbol side that was carried over during the transition control from the state to the normal game state, the game performance will be realized, but on realizing such game performance Then, it is important to perform the process on the normal symbol side so as to position the lottery on the second special symbol side as a relatively rare event. Hereinafter, the processing on the normal symbol side will be described.

[Regular control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an example of the normal control process (step S15).

Now, in the process of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 1134, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S2010, the main control MPU 4100a first executes a gate unit passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of a normal symbol from a random number counter and storing it in a normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e.

Next, in the normal control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2100).
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S2200) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the random symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing to wait until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is stopped (step S2300)
4. Stop the variable display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 Normal symbol stop processing to be performed (step S2400)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", by sliding the starting opening door member 1214 to the appearance position, within the game area 1100. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for forming a bridging passage connecting the flow path of the game ball and the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island winning opening) (step S2500)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control internal RAM 4100e.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate portion passing process (step S2010).

Now, in the process of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 1134, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S2011, the main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the processing of step S2011, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbols to be reserved is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S2012 to S2014 is performed to newly place the variable display control of the ordinary symbols in a newly suspended state. Will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S2012, the ordinary holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S2013, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S2014, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the process of step S2011, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbols to be reserved is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S2100).

When the normal control flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 145, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as the process of step S2101, the normal reserved number counter. Based on the counter value by, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S2102, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode (eg, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM 4100e. Then, as a process of steps S2103 and S2104, the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a while counting down the normal hold number counter Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) related to (1) are shifted in a first-in first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with passage of a game ball to the gate unit 1134 in order from the first (first) area. To do. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 1134 when the random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N=2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first).

Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current gaming state is a time saving gaming state (YES in step S2105), selects a time saving time universal figure hitting determination table (not shown) (step S2106), If the current game state is a non-time saving game state (normal game state) (NO in step S2105), a non-time saving general figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107), and the selected general figure hit The determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2102 of the normal symbol normal process (step S2108).

Note that the universal figure hitting determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is time saving and is used when the gaming state is non-time saving. It is provided with a general-universal-person hit determination table for non-time saving. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the universal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number is the ordinary figure hit determination table for time saving and the universal figure hit determination table for non-time saving. In all of the above cases, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers agree with the per-universal-drawing judgment value indicating that the per-universal figure has been won, and the per-universal figure indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync does not match the deviation determination value As described above, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 1134, the game ball is always won regardless of the game state, and the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type) The control for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 to the appearance position is performed so that a bridge passage connecting the winning opening) is formed.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting opening 1153, while in the time saving game state the first It is important to have a configuration in which the game balls enter the second starting port 1153 more easily than the starting port 1152, and in the case where the configuration is feasible, this is the case for the probability of hitting a normal symbol. May be set appropriately.

Then, when the main control MPU 4100a compares the selected universal figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number and determines that it is a universal figure hit (step S2109), the variation concerned is won as a universal figure hit. After setting the universal symbol hit flag (step S2110), it determines the universal symbol hit symbol as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped (step S2112). On the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary figure per-judgment table and the ordinary random number, when it is determined that the ordinary figure is out of the ordinary pattern as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variable control of the ordinary symbol is stopped, It is determined (step S2111). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2200) (step S2113), this process ends.

[Regarding the operation mode of the starting opening door member 1214 when a universal figure hit is obtained in the normal gaming state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting opening 1153 in the normal game state.

Also, as described above, the second starting port 1153 according to the present embodiment is an isolated island type winning port provided at a position apart from the downflow route in which the game ball can flow down in the game area 1100. It is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and when it is at the appearance position of the collapsed position and the appearance position, the downflow path and the second starting port 1153 ( It is used as a bridge passage connecting the remote island type prize opening) and the game ball on the above-mentioned flow-down path is located in a direction (right direction) different from the depth direction to the second starting opening 1153 (remote island type prize opening). By providing the starting opening door member 1214 (tonbolo type movable member) provided so as to roll, it is possible to strictly distinguish between an operation that allows the game ball to be bridged and an operation that does not allow the game ball to be used properly. Has been realized.

In this respect, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, when a universal figure hit is obtained in the normal game state, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, on the downflow route in the game area 1100. A time shorter than the prize-winning threshold time required for the game ball in (1) to reach the third guide portion 1214c after starting rolling in the first guide portion 1214a (for example, 0.088 seconds). Be sure to select it. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, every time a universal figure hit is obtained, the flow path of the game balls in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port) by the sliding operation by the starting port door member 1214. A bridging passage (upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214) that connects the two will appear. However, this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214) is always extinguished before the game ball from the downflow path has crossed, and the game ball slides so as to spill the game ball.

According to such a configuration, in the normal game state, the game ball is not received in the second starting opening 1153 by the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, but when the starting opening door member 1214 operates, the game is started. Since a bridging passage that connects the downflow path of the gaming ball in the area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island winning port) is formed, the gaming ball can be rolled in the bridging passage. The expectation of winning the prize in the second starting opening 1153 is naturally increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

[Regarding the operation mode of the starting opening door member 1214 when a universal figure hit is obtained in the time saving game state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important that the game ball is easily inserted into the second starting opening 1153 in the time saving game state.

In this respect, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIG. 122 and FIG. 123, when the universal figure hit is obtained in the time saving game state, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, on the downflow route in the game area 1100. A time longer than the prize-winning threshold time (for example, 1.5 seconds) required for the game ball in to reach the third guide portion 1214c after starting to roll in the first guide portion 1214a. Be sure to select it. That is, in this case, even in the time saving game state, every time a universal figure hit is obtained, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port) by the sliding operation by the starting port door member 1214. A bridging passage (upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214) connecting the two appears. However, in addition to this, if the right-handing is continued, at least one of the game balls from the above-mentioned flow path (here, at least two game balls for a firing interval of 0.6 seconds (1 .5 seconds)) is crossed over this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214) and is accepted by the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island type winning opening). The game ball in the passage (upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) will slide so as to spill it.

According to such a configuration, in the time-saving game state, every time the operation of the start door member 1214 is performed, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second start opening 1153 (isolated island type prize opening) are set. Since the game ball that has crossed the bridging passage to be connected is received by the second starting port 1153, the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 1153.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, at the stage where the starting opening door member 1214 is started to retract and the winning of the second starting opening 1153 is not preferable, The system is constructed by a structure in which the brake is automatically applied to the speed toward the second starting port 1153 by the frictional force corresponding to the contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Therefore, in addition to the control related to the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, such an automatic brake system also increases the certainty of non-winning prize when performing the operation that does not allow the bridging of the game balls. Furthermore, even when a relatively long bridging passage is realized as the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting is performed from the time when the starting opening door member 1214 starts to move backward (displacement from the appearance position to the collapsed position). It becomes possible to enhance the immediacy until the ball cannot enter the mouth 1153.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball on the downflow route in the game area 1100 is the first guide portion 1214a. Only the time (adverse game mode) shorter than the prize-winning threshold time required from the start of rolling to the arrival at the third guiding portion 1214c can be selected. However, in the normal game state, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball on the downflow route in the game area 1100 starts rolling in the first guide portion 1214a and then the third guide portion. A time longer than the prize winning threshold time required to reach 1214c may be selected with a predetermined probability.

That is, in this case, when in the normal game state, an advantageous game mode in which a random number for the second special symbol (high-precision starting information) can be put on hold until a predetermined number can appear, and the advantageous game Second special symbol lottery (game on the side where the probability of getting a big hit game is high) that has been put on hold while the mode is being set is after the advantageous game mode is finished (the winning is possible) After the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is completed over a time period longer than the threshold time period, it becomes possible to be digested. And, as described above, the probability that the big hit game can be generated while the four second special symbol lottery in the hold state is being digested (the probability that either the big hit or the advantageous small hit can be obtained) is 50. Since the probability is higher than %, it is possible to enjoy such a high probability lottery game even in the normal game state.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 146, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initialization process (step S1001). In this initial setting processing, processing for clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has passed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003) and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamps/LEDs, the speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S1002, the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1106. In the command analysis processing of step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1102, the control process related to the effect display device 1115 is executed based on the reception of the change pattern command transmitted by setting the change pattern (step S409).

Also, in the sound control processing of step S1103, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S1104, control processing relating to the lamp/LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp/LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 3041 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S1106, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

Note that the processing of steps S1101 to S1106 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S1101 when 16 ms elapses after the 16 ms steady process is started. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1102 that the 16 ms elapse flag has been set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update the various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating the various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

[Display effect on effect display device 1115]
Regarding the display effect on the effect display device 1115 of the present embodiment, a control example relating to the effect will be described.

For example, on the display screen of the effect display device 1115, three decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the vertical direction (three decorative symbol columns) and a background image that appears behind these decorative symbols are each effect-displayed.

Here, the procedure of the control relating to the display effect on the effect display device 1115 is as follows. That is, assuming that a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the main control board 4100 first performs a jackpot determination process based on the special random number already acquired at this time. In this determination process, not only the determination of whether the big hit is won, but also the number of rounds of the big hit game performed when it is determined that the big hit is won) and the game state after the end of the big hit game (time saving game state and Whether or not to perform) is also determined. However, the judgment on the big hit is made based on the random number for special judgment among the special random numbers, whereas the judgment on the number of rounds and the gaming state is made based on the symbol random number among the special random numbers. ..

Next, in the main control board 4100, the variation time of the special symbol is determined based on the determination result of the big hit and the variation random number already obtained at this time (obtained based on the winning of the starting opening). decide.

Then, in the main control board 4100, each result information thus determined and determined is output to the peripheral control unit 4140. As a result, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the display effect on the effect display device 1115 based on the result information thus output from the main control board 4100.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 4140, first of all, among the result information from the main control board 4100, based on the result information relating to the winning of the big hit, an effect table dedicated to the winning of the big hit and an effect dedicated to the loss of the big hit. Select one with the table. In these effect tables, the contents of the display effect on the effect display device 1115 are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each other according to the variation time of the special symbol.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 4140, after selecting one of the two effect tables, the result information from the main control board 4100 is selected based on the determination information about the variation time of the special symbol. Any one of the contents of the display effects stored in the effect table is selected (determined).

Then, in the peripheral control unit 4140, the information related to the content of the selected display effect is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the display command. As a result, the content of the display effect selected based on the result information from the main control board 4100 appears on the effect display device 1115. At this time, the information (command) generated in response to the selection of the content of the display effect is appropriately output to the lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3045, the sound source IC 4140c, and the like. Various effects linked with the display effects on the effect display device 1115 are realized.

In the present embodiment, when a special symbol combination (a symbol combination that appears as a number in which all three decorative symbols are arranged) appears on the display screen of the effect display device 1115, it is suggested that the jackpot is won. Then, when a symbol combination different from the special symbol combination (a symbol combination appearing with a number in which all three decorative symbols are not complete) appears on the display screen of the effect display device 1115, it is suggested that the jackpot is lost. To be done.

FIG. 148 is a time showing an example of the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment advances the game based on the novel game property described above, and the flow of the production matching it. It is a chart. Hereinafter, various processes when a game is progressed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized.

As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, in the normal game state, as the operating time of the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball on the downflow path in the game area 1100 is the first guide portion 1214a. Only the time shorter than the prize winning threshold time required from the start of rolling in to reach the third guiding portion 1214c can be selected. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball toward the left side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the first starting port 1152 is provided, rather than the second starting port 1153. To be done.

On the other hand, in the time saving game state, as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball on the downflow path in the game area 1100 starts rolling from the first guide portion 1214a, and then the Only a time longer than the prize winning threshold time required to reach the third guiding portion 1214c can be selected. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the game ball toward the right side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the second starting port 1153 is provided (to hit the right).

Under such a game condition, if the game is now controlled to the normal game state, the player performs a game in which the player hits left and puts a game ball into the first starting opening 1152. Will be done. As a result, each time the game ball enters the first starting port 1152, the first special symbol lottery is put on hold until a predetermined upper limit value (four in this case). Then, the first special symbol lottery that has been held in this way, by being digested according to the order held when the starting condition on the first special symbol side is satisfied (FIG. 134: YES in step S302), the figure Under the conditions shown in 141, the first special symbol lottery will be performed.

However, as shown in FIG. 141, the result of the first special symbol lottery includes "big hit" and "advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit)" as a hit (winning) that causes a big hit game. However, the probability that a big hit will be obtained is a low probability such as "1/400", and the probability that an advantageous small hit will be obtained (multiplication value of the small hit probability and the probability that an advantageous small hit will be selected in the type judgment). As a result, the probability is extremely low such as "1/8571".

Therefore, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, basically, "winning lottery" which does not correspond to "big hit" and "advantageous small hit" will be obtained, and based on the result of the "lottery" While varying the first special symbol for the determined variation time, when the variation time elapses, a stop symbol corresponding to "losing" appears, and the control is performed. However, as a type of "losing", in addition to losing, a disadvantageous small hit is generally obtained with a probability of "1/175", so a stop symbol corresponding to "losing" appears. In some cases, the control for executing the small hit game at the time of a disadvantageous small hit may be further performed after being made.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when "advantageous small hit" is obtained, the game is performed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the character prize winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). It is possible to start the big hit game as long as the game (continue the right-handed game) is maintained so that the state where the ball exists (waiting for winning prize) is maintained. When the game balls are won in the prize winning hole 1155, the prize winning hole opening/closing member 1221 is set so that none of the game balls is distributed to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156. The opening and closing operation is as described above.

Also, as described above, if the second disadvantage small hit of the disadvantage small hit is obtained, within the period during which the small hit game is performed, the advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) ) Is obtained, or control for operating the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 is performed in the same or similar opened manner. In addition, at this time, the expected display that allows the effect display device 1115 to be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained may be performed.

And, as a result of repeating such a game, if the jackpot (1/400) is finally obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (FIG. 128: step S402a). After setting the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (FIG. 128: step S410), the variation of the first special symbol is started.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the timing t11 at which the fluctuation timer times up arrives, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is ended by causing the stop symbol at the time of a big hit to appear. After the appearance of the stop symbol at the time of big hit, the big hit game pre-start interval period is generated, and the big hit game is started to be executed on the basis of the pre-start interval period of the big hit game.

In the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, only the 15R hour short-time big hit is obtained as the kind of big hit, so the above round game is repeated 15 times. The jackpot game is considered to have ended at the time of the break. Then, after that, an end interval of the big hit game is generated, and when the end interval period of the big hit game is elapsed, the time saving function is operated to perform the transition control to the time saving game state (timing t12).

However, as described above, when a big hit game is played according to the lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit) on the second special symbol side, approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained. , If the big hit game according to the lottery result on the first special symbol side (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) is played, it is possible to obtain only about 400 game balls, so a relatively short period The big hit game ends and the transition control to the time saving game state is performed.

In addition, although this is also described above, in the first special symbol lottery, the first advantageous small hit is rarely obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery. However, when the big hit game is generated through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the first advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball has been received in the V winning opening 1156), the first advantageous small hit is also obtained. Regardless of the gaming state at the time of playing, the transition control to the time saving gaming state is performed by activating the time saving function when the end interval period of the big hit game has passed (timing t12).

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, one of the purposes thereof is to execute a game in which a prize can be won by a player as a set of big hit games (two big hit games). As a result, it is possible not only to double the number of prizes that can be acquired by one game per game than in the past (up to 4000), but also to pay out such a large amount of prizes. The set big hit game (two big hit games) may be provided with loop performance capable of being repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate of more than 50%.

Therefore, in the time saving game state according to the present embodiment, by causing a game in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 1153 (right-handed), as shown in FIG. 141, the jackpot game is started. Of the hits (big hits, second advantageous small hits), particularly, the probability that the second advantageous small hits can be obtained is as high as 1/6. The big win, the second advantageous small win) is a probability of the second special symbol lottery) 10 times higher than the probability of being obtained). When both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery have a hold, as described above, the second special symbol lottery is first digested regardless of the holding order.

That is, in this case, the second special symbol lottery is only consumed by the upper limit holding number (4 times), and the probability of winning the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) exceeds 50%. Therefore, normally, the second advantageous small hit is obtained at a relatively early timing t13 by controlling the shift to the time-saving game state, and the number of times the special symbol that has been exhausted is changed to a predetermined upper limit value (100). It is almost impossible for the game condition that the time saving game state is ended by reaching the number of times). Then, through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156), the second stage (second half) of the set of big hit games After the big hit game is generated (timing t14), it is returned to the normal gaming state (timing t15).

In addition, as a result of the second special symbol lottery being digested in the time saving game state, as a big hit game start (big hit, second advantageous small hit), a big hit game is also generated in the rare case where a big hit is won. After this (timing t14), it is controlled to shift to the normal gaming state (timing t15).

According to the game control in such a time saving game state, from the sense of the player side, the big hit game at the time of winning in the normal game state (the first stage big hit game) and the time saving game state are controlled. The big hit game for the second time and the big hit game that is expected to be obtained immediately (the second stage big hit game) are provided as a set of big hit games. However, here, the big hit game of the first stage corresponds to the result of the first special symbol lottery, and since only 400 game balls can be obtained, the big hit game for two times As a result, 2400 game balls can be acquired.

Then, at a timing t15 after the one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is provided in this way, it is returned to the normal game state, but in the normal game state, it is in the hold state when in the time saving game state. It is possible to digest the second special symbol lottery. In other words, even in the normal game state, the probability of winning the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is dramatically increased, and the game on the side (second special symbol lottery) is suspended. It is designed to be able to be digested only for a few minutes, and the big hit game will be started (big hit, second advantageous small hit) by the end of the digestion of the holding number, and the short time game state will be regained. It becomes possible to provide a novel game property such as whether or not the transition can be controlled (whether one set of big hit game (two big hit games) can be restarted).

As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when a big hit game (first stage big hit game) is generated as a result of the lottery in the normal game state, the type of the big hit (big hit, small hit) Regardless of the type) of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), to start a set of big jackpot game (two big jackpot games), the big jackpot game (first stage big jackpot game) After, it is supposed to generate a time saving game state.

In this respect, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, in the normal game state returned after the above-mentioned one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is provided, the four second specials already in the hold state The probability of winning the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) while the symbol lottery is being digested is "671 / 1296" (=1- (5/6) 4), which allows the above-mentioned one set of big hit games (two big hit games) to be loopable with a probability of 50% or more (basically, the advantageous state is continued. Performance).

And, as a hit (big hit, second advantage small hit) to start the big hit game while the four second special symbol lottery already held in the normal game state is being digested, the second advantage small hit was won. In the case (timing t16), through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156), the big hit game (first stage big hit game) After generating (timing t17), it is controlled to shift to the time saving game state (timing t18).

In addition, as a hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game while the four second special symbol lottery that is already on hold in the normal game state is being digested, it is a rare but big hit. In the same manner, after the big hit game (first stage big hit game) is generated (timing t17), it is controlled to shift to the time saving game state (timing t18).

As described above, in the main control MPU 4100a according to the present embodiment, in the time saving game state, the second advantageous small hit is usually obtained at the relatively early timing t19. After the big hit game (the second-stage big hit game) is generated through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156). (Timing t20), it will be returned to the normal game state (timing t21).

As a result of the second special symbol lottery being digested in the time saving game state, the big hit game is started (big hit, second advantageous small hit), but in the rare case of winning the big hit, the big hit game (two After the big hit game of the stage is generated (timing t20), the transition to the normal gaming state is controlled (timing t21).

Then, as described above, after the big hit game for two times is provided as one set of big hit game, in the normal game state, the second special symbol lottery which is put on hold in the time saving game state is sequentially digested. By doing so, it is possible to win the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game by the end of digestion of the reserved number, and to control again to shift to the time saving game state. Whether or not (one set of big hit game (two big hit games) can be restarted), a novel game property is provided.

According to the control (timing t16 to t22) related to one set of big hit game (two big hit games), not only the second big hit game (timing t20 to t21) but also the first big hit game. (Timings t17 to t18) can also be performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. Therefore, in any of the big hit games, a prize that allows 2000 game balls to be won is given, and as a result, one set of big hit games (two big hit games) is about 4000 times as large as the conventional one. It becomes possible to obtain individual game balls.

Then, after one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is started, every time the game is returned to the normal play state, the big hit while the four second special symbol lottery items already in the hold state are exhausted As long as the win (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the game is obtained (timing t22), the prize that 4000 game balls can be won by one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is repeated Can be granted.

For example, at the timing t22, as a result of sequentially digesting the second special symbol lottery in the hold state, as a result of starting the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit), a second advantageous small hit is obtained, By generating a big hit game (first stage big hit game) through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156) (timing t23) First of all, 2000 game balls can be acquired.

In this way, when 2000 game balls can be obtained, it is controlled to shift to the time saving game state (timing t24), but in this time saving game state, the big hit game at an early stage without reducing the number of balls held. It is set as a game condition in which the hit (big hit, second advantageous small hit) for starting can be obtained again. Therefore, if the second advantageous small hit is obtained at a relatively early timing t25 by controlling the transition to the time saving game state, through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second advantageous small hit (the game ball to the V winning opening 1156). (Based on the fact that is accepted), by generating a big hit game (big hit game of the second stage) (timing t26), it becomes possible to obtain 2000 more game balls.

Then, as described above, after the big hit game for two times is provided as one set of big hit game, in the normal game state, the second special symbol lottery which is put on hold in the time saving game state is sequentially digested. By doing so, it is possible to win the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game by the end of digestion of the reserved number, and to control again to shift to the time saving game state. Whether or not (one set of big hit game (two big hit games) can be restarted), a novel game property is provided.

However, while such game play is provided, despite the fact that the second special symbol lottery that was put on hold when in the time saving game state was sequentially digested, the big hit game was started (big hit, If you do not win the second advantageous small hit), in the normal game state where the second special symbol lottery can not be newly put on hold, the player left-handed, the first The game is restarted from the game in which the game ball is inserted into the starting opening 1152.

According to such a game control, if the player wins the big hit game in the normal game state (big hit, advantageous small hit), two big hit games are performed as one set of big hit game. Like Then, each time one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is finished, it is once returned to the normal game state, and one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is generated again with a success rate of 50% or more. A loop challenge game (maximum four second special symbol lottery that is already on hold) about what can be done will be performed. In addition, in the period when the loop challenge game is performed, although it has been returned to the normal game state, just confirming that the maximum of four second special symbol lottery items that are already on hold are being exhausted, etc. No games will be played. And, as long as it succeeds in generating one set of big hit game (two big hit games) each time such a loop challenge game is given, one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is regarded as one unit. While the special game state is repeatedly executed, when it fails to generate one set of big hit game (two big hit games), the game is restarted from the game under the normal game condition. Innovative gameplay such as, will be realized.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the following effects according to the flow of the game when the game is advanced based on such novel game characteristics. There is.

That is, as shown in FIG. 148(b), first, a disadvantageous game before a game in which one set of jackpot game as a unit is moved to a special game state in which there is a probability of 50% or more can be looped. When in the state, the first special symbol lottery is repeatedly performed under the game condition shown in FIG. 141, as described above. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, first, the effect display device 1115 is also controlled so that the symbol variation effect (miss variation) according to the result of the first special symbol lottery appears repeatedly.

However, while such a symbol variation effect (loss variation) is repeatedly performed, the symbol at the time of a disadvantage small hit may stop in rare cases. And as described above, when the second disadvantage small hit of the disadvantage small hit is obtained, the same as the case where the advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained until the middle stage in the small hit game, or Since the control for operating the accessory winning port opening/closing member 1221 is performed in an approximate opening mode, an expected effect that allows the effect display device 1115 to be aware of the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained appears. Will be controlled as follows.

In addition, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, although extremely rare, even when the first advantageous small hit (1/8571) is obtained, as in the case where the second disadvantage small hit is obtained, the effect display device In 1115, control is performed so that an expected effect that can be made aware of the possibility that the first advantageous small hit has been obtained appears. However, after the timing t8 shown in FIG. 142, it is possible to recognize that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by causing a production image different from that in the case where the second disadvantage small hit is obtained. It will be.

And, as a result of repeating such a game, when the jackpot (1/400) is finally obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the fluctuation at the time of the jackpot obtained from the main control MPU 4100a. The effect pattern corresponding to the pattern is selected, and the control is performed so that the effect pattern appears until the timing t11.

Then, when the stop symbol at the time of big hit appears at timing t11, it is assumed that the first special game state (one set of big hit game (two big hit games)) is started, and first, the big hit game of the first stage and the second. A first-half bonus effect that indicates that the first half of the stage big hit game (first stage big hit game) is being played is displayed.

As a result, at the timing t12, when the first-stage big-hit game is completed, the above-mentioned one set of big-hit game (while being controlled to the time saving game state before the second-stage big-hit game is started ( A loop challenge preparation effect is performed to increase the probability that two big hit games will be continued to a probability value of 50% or more.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the performance of making it possible to loop the above-mentioned one set of big hit game (two big hit games) with a probability of 50% or more. , Before returning to the normal game state, while the time saving function is operating, the second special symbol lottery (lottery on the side where the chance to start the big hit game with a high probability is obtained) This is realized by putting up to four pending states.

For example, suppose that the number of second special symbol lottery held is returned to the normal game state in the state that there are only three hits to start the big hit game while the second special symbol lottery in the three held state is being digested The probability of winning (big hit, second advantageous small hit) is roughly "91/216" (=1-(5/6)3), ignoring the big hit probability as an error. The big hit game (two big hit games) can only be looped with a probability of less than 50%.

Therefore, in the loop challenge preparation effect, first, when timing t12 arrives, a display indicating that the player should aim for winning in the second starting opening 1153 by right-handing appears, and the winning in the second starting opening 1153 is also revealed. Each time the second special symbol lottery is performed on the basis, the decorative symbols (three decorative symbol columns) are variably displayed. Then, unless a hit to start the big hit game is obtained in the second special symbol lottery, a lost symbol (a symbol display which is not a complete set of three) that is shown to be a loss when the symbol is stopped is made to appear. ..

However, usually, as a big start game in the second special symbol lottery, because the second advantageous small hit is obtained at an early stage, it is shown that it is a winning symbol when the symbol is stopped (3 matching The symbol display) will appear. It should be noted that, after the effect image showing that the small hit has been won (for example, the symbol display of three sets is displayed), an interval period before the start of the small hit game occurs, and an interval before the start of the small hit game. As described above, the execution of the small hit game is started based on the lapse of the period.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when an effect image showing that the small hit is won in the time-saving game state (for example, a symbol display of three sets) appears, in the effect display device 1115, by the small hit game. It is often the case that the opportunity to win the prize winning opening 1155 is not missed by causing a production display (preparation effect) to appear that the player should aim to win the prize winning opening 1155. It was

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, when an effect image showing that the small hit is won in the time saving game state (for example, a symbol display of three sets) appears, first, by the small hit game. Instead of the accessory winning opening 1155 that is opened, the effect display indicating that the second starting opening 1153 should be aimed is displayed.

In other words, the effect image showing that the small hit has been won can be said to be due to the result of the lottery obtained by digesting the second special symbol lottery that was on hold, so at this point in time , There is a high possibility that the number of reserved second special symbol lottery has not reached at least the upper limit value (four) (there is a possibility that at most one less than the upper limit value). On the other hand, in the small hit game, as shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, since the condition device does not operate, unlike the case of the big hit game (FIGS. 139 and 140), the operation of the time saving function There is no need to start or stop.

Therefore, when an effect image showing that the small hit is won appears, first, if an effect display indicating that the player should aim to win the second starting opening 1153 is made to appear, a right hit by the player can be achieved. Done. Then, the game ball hit right in this way operates the time saving function until the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened by the small hit game (until the interval period before the start of the small hit game is finished). In the meantime, it will be accepted by the second starting opening 1153 with a high probability through the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state.

As a result, the second special symbol lottery can be held up to four, which is the upper limit holding number, and then the small hit game is started (timing t13), and the second big hit game can be started. From that (timing t14), when the second-stage jackpot game is finished and returned to the normal gaming state (timing t15), such a special gaming state (one set of jackpot games (two jackpot games)) It is possible to preferably avoid a situation in which the loop can be performed only with a probability of less than 50%.

Note that the effect image showing that the small hit has been won't necessarily have to be a three-symbol design display, and may be one that appears during the change of the decorative design, for example. That is, in this case, since it is possible to promote the winning to the second starting opening 1153 from the middle of the fluctuation of the symbol, a time margin is created, and the second special symbol lottery is the upper limit holding number. It is possible to more reliably avoid that the small hitting game is started or the second-stage big hitting game is started without being able to hold up to four.

As described above, the loop challenge preparation effect according to the present embodiment is a stage in which the big hit game is not started yet (the second advantageous small hit is obtained, but the V winning opening 1156 is obtained). In addition to the fact that the game ball is not accepted, the stage where the prize winning opening 1155 is not yet opened by the small hit game), the inconvenience after the big hit game occurs when the big hit game is supposed to occur. This is to urge the player to make a predetermined preparation so as not to get it, and it can be said that the novel game nature described above is thereby realized.

Moreover, according to such a loop challenge preparation effect, before the small hitting game is started, the game ball is passed through the upper surface of the accessory winning opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. I'm trying to make a launch. Therefore, the game balls that are in the prize-waiting state will naturally continue to exist on the upper surface of the character prize opening/closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state, whereby the prize is already won when the small hit game is started. It becomes possible to enter the game ball in the waiting state into the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, in the pre-start interval period of the small hitting game, an effect of promoting winning in the second starting opening 1153 is performed, but instead of this, the small hitting is performed. It may be possible to provide a period during which the winning of the second starting opening 1153 is urged during the variation time of the decorative pattern according to the winning, or it may extend over both the variation time and the pre-start interval period. A period during which the winning of the prize in the second starting opening 1153 is urged may be provided.

In the loop challenge preparation effect, after the effect display for prompting the winning to the second starting opening 1153 is performed, the winning to the accessory winning opening 1155 is promoted before the small hit game is started. The effect display may be further performed.

Then, after such a loop challenge preparation effect is performed, at the timing t14, the latter half of the first-stage big hit game and the second-stage big hit game (second-stage big hit game) is performed. The second half bonus effect, which is shown to be in the situation, appears.

As a result, when the second-stage jackpot game is finished at timing t15, a maximum of four second special symbol lottery items that have been put on hold during the period of the loop challenge preparation effect and the like are being controlled in the normal game state. Is it possible to win the big hit game (big hit, second advantageous small hit) while being sequentially digested so that it can be controlled to shift to the shorter working time state again (1 set of big hit game? (Is it possible to restart the big hit game for two times)?

Such a loop challenge effect can be realized, for example, as an effect such as whether or not a specific symbol stop mode can be made to appear while executing the symbol variation four times. That is, in this case, when the second advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, at the time when the symbol stop mode corresponding to the second advantageous small hit appears (the game ball in the V winning opening 1156). Is not accepted, and at the stage where the prize winning port 1155 is not yet opened by the small hit game), the second special game state is generated (one set of big hit game (two big hit games) Will be shown to have been successful (success production).

It should be noted that, in spite of such uncertainties regarding the progress of the game, the background in which such a successful effect is executable is the second as shown in FIGS. 142(d) and (e). When an advantageous small hit is obtained, “under the condition that if even one game ball enters the inside area of the winning prize hole 1155, the player is guided to the V winning hole 1156 (timing t3 to t4), It is nothing but because the opening operation is performed a plurality of times with a relatively long closing interval between which a game ball that has been placed in a prize-winning state can be created." That is, in this case, between the timings t3 and t4 (more accurately, after the timing t3 and until the fifth opening operation is completed), even one game ball is the winning a prize opening/closing member 1221 ( At the time of arriving at the door portion 1221a), regardless of the opening/closing state, that the game ball enters the internal area of the prize winning opening 1155 and that the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156, respectively. You will be able to confirm.

Then, each time a successful effect appears in the loop challenge effect, it is controlled to a new special game state, so that the game progresses in the special game state as in the case of the above-described effect example (timing t11 to t16). In addition, the first half bonus effect, the loop challenge preparation effect, the second half bonus effect, and the loop challenge effect are sequentially executed.

However, the success production does not appear in the loop challenge production, the maximum of four second special symbol lottery in the pending state is sequentially digested, while the big hit game is started (big hit, second advantageous small hit) When it is not possible to win (timing t28), the game state is shifted to an unfavorable gaming state. That is, in this case, while the first special symbol lottery is repeatedly performed under the game condition shown in FIG. 141, in the effect display device 1115 as well, the symbol variation effect according to the result of the first special symbol lottery (normally, It is controlled so that the loss variation) appears repeatedly.

By the way, in the second special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, among the hits (big hit, second advantageous small hit) to start the big hit game, particularly, the probability of getting the second advantageous small hit is as high as 1/6. It is considered as a probability. Therefore, while in the special game state described above, it is possible to make a leading judgment about the result of the second special symbol lottery in the holding state and perform an effect based on the leading judgment (so-called prefetching effect). It seems to be effective in improving interests.

However, during the period in which the loop challenge preparation effect is performed, it is not assured that a big hit game will be generated (for example, a game ball is not yet held in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, V When the game ball is guided to the winning opening 1156 (a state where it is not yet assured), if the above-mentioned prefetching effect is performed, the following problems occur.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that the second advantageous small hit is obtained is set to a high probability such as 1/6, and among the maximum four reserved numbers for the second special symbol lottery. It is also set as a probability that it is possible to expect a situation in which a small number of wins (advantageous wins) are won by a plurality of players.

In this respect, in the state where it has not been assured to generate a big hit game, if the look-ahead effect for each result of the second special symbol lottery in the pending state appears, for example, a plurality of second special symbols Until the winning lottery shows that you have won a small hit (advantageous small hit), even if a small hit game is played, it is a big hit by not letting the game ball enter the accessory winning hole 1155. There is a concern that a game technique such as not intentionally generating a game may be adopted. That is, in this case, although the upper limit number of times (100 times) depending on the variation of the special symbol that can be continued as the time saving game state is set, the game method is within the range in which the time saving game state is not ended in consideration of such an upper limit number of times. If it is used properly, the set value for paying out as the pachinko machine 1 may be exceeded, which may cause a disadvantage to the hall side.

Therefore, when performing the look-ahead effect for each result of the second special symbol lottery that is in the hold state when in the special game state described above, it is performed at a timing after it is assured that the big hit game is generated. Is desirable. In this case, in addition to the guaranteed big hit game, there is a possibility that four big hit games, which is the upper limit of the number of second special symbol lottery reserves, may be further played, so a maximum of five big hit games. There is a possibility that it can be recognized that 10000 game balls will be acquired from now on.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game in which the player can win the prize is executed as one set of big hit game (two big hit games), as described above. is there.

Therefore, for example, in the period in which the loop challenge preparation effect is performed, when the look-ahead effect is performed for each result of the second special symbol lottery that is in the hold state at the timing after it is assured that the big hit game is generated Is a guaranteed big hit game is the "second stage big hit game in the current special game state", the first look ahead hit (win big hit game start (big hit, second advantageous small hit)) The big hit game indicated by (per hit) is the "first stage big hit game in the next special game state", and the big hit game indicated by the second look-ahead hit is the "next special game state". 2nd stage big hit game in ", the big hit game shown by the 3rd look-ahead hit is "the 1st step big hit game in the special game state of the next time", and the big hit shown by the 4th look-ahead The game is a "second stage big hit game in the special game state of the next one".

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the "second stage big hit game" can be automatically executed when the "first stage big hit game" is performed. Is decided. Therefore, as a result of such a pre-reading effect, if the pre-reading hit is obtained in one of the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state, and in the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state In the case where the pre-reading hit is obtained by two of the two, at this point, two big hit games (first stage big hit game and second stage big hit game in the next special game state) can be started. It can be said that they are the same in that they are determined to be possible. Further, like this, as a result of such prefetching effect, when prefetching hit is obtained in three of the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state, and the second special in the suspended state. When the look-ahead hit is obtained in four of the symbol lottery, at this time, all four big hit games (big hit game of the first stage and big hit game of the second stage in the next special game state, and It can be said that it is the same in that it is determined that it is possible to start the first-stage big hit game and the second-stage big hit game in the special game state of the next and subsequent times.

However, in reality, 2 of the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state, as compared to the case where the pre-reading hit is obtained only in one of the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state. When the pre-reading hit is obtained, the expected value of the number of prizes that the player can obtain may be lower than the expected value.

For example, now, within the period of timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, of the second special symbol lottery in the four holding states, the second special symbol lottery which is firstly digested and the second special symbol which is secondly digested Whereas the pre-reading hit is obtained in two with the second special symbol lottery, two of the second special symbol lottery that is digested third and the second special symbol lottery that is digested fourth It is assumed that there occurs a situation in which a performance result such that the look-ahead hit is not obtained. Then, in the loop challenge production started from the timing t15, the second special game state is generated based on the result of the second special symbol lottery (prefetching) that is digested first (one set of jackpot game ( It will be shown that the two big jackpot games) have been restarted) (success production).

However, in this case, the second special symbol lottery that is secondly digested, the second special symbol lottery that is thirdly digested, and the second special symbol lottery that is fourthly digested are both left as pending states. Will be done. Therefore, when the time saving game state is started at timing t18, the second special symbol lottery that is secondly digested will be firstly digested, and based on the result (prefetching), one set of jackpot game The big hit game of the second stage will be started (timing t20).

However, in this case, the second special symbol lottery to be digested third and the second special symbol lottery to be digested fourth are both left as a pending state. Therefore, in the loop challenge production started from the timing t21, even if the four second special symbol lottery is put on hold, the second second special symbol lottery in which the digestion order is early is digested to the third. The second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be digested to the fourth are the second special symbol lottery, and it has been clarified that the prefetch hit has not been obtained already. That is, in this case, it is clear that it is practically impossible to have the expectation of looping the special game state only to the two second special symbol lottery added as the hold state after the prefetching effect is performed. is there.

On the other hand, within the period of timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, only one of the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state among the four special symbol lottery in the suspended state If the pre-reading hit is not obtained, the second special symbol lottery for which the pre-reading hit is obtained causes the second special game state to occur (one set of big hit game (two big hit games) is started again. ) It will be.

However, at this time, even if the second special symbol lottery for which the look-ahead hit has not been obtained is left as a pending state, for the remaining second special symbol lottery, all are lost in the time saving game state started from timing t18. It will only be digested. That is, in this case, in addition to the fact that the big hit game is started at a relatively early stage by the second special symbol lottery that is newly put on hold in the time saving game state, the loop started from the timing t21. Even in the challenge production, it is possible to have the expectation of looping the special game state in all of the four second special symbol lottery newly held.

In this way, if the pre-reading hit is obtained in one of the second special symbol lottery held, the special game state can be looped even in the loop challenge effect starting from timing t21. Whereas the probability that can be exceeded exceeds 50%, if the pre-reading hit is obtained in two of the second special symbol lottery held, the special game in the loop challenge production started from timing t21. Since the probability that the state can be looped is almost "11/36" (=1-(5/6)2), the expected number of prizes that can be obtained by the player is lower than the expected value. It is clear that it will happen.

According to such a configuration, among the second special symbol lottery that is in the hold state, it may be disadvantageous for the player to win a large number of hits when starting the big hit game. It will be possible to make this a novel one as a pre-reading effect based on the premise.

On the other hand, according to such a configuration, in the period of the timing t13 to t14 shown in FIG. 148, among the second special symbol lottery in the four holding states, three pre-reading in the second special symbol lottery If the winning can be obtained, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the case where the prefetching hit can be obtained in the four second special symbol lottery. That is, in this case, including the guaranteed big hit game (big hit game started at timing t14), it is recognized that it is possible to win 5 big hit games and obtain 10,000 game balls. You will be able to. Moreover, according to such a configuration, even if the probability that five big hit games are played and 10,000 game balls can be obtained, this is more than the probability (1/400) that a big hit is obtained. Since it is possible to increase the cost, it is possible to sufficiently expect, and it is possible to favorably improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Re-explanation of the internal area of the prize winning slot 1155]
The game ball T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is sent to the upper opening 1238b side which is open to the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and when the game ball T reaches the upper opening 1238b, the rotating body is rotated. When the receiving portion 1236a of the 1236 is located at the accommodation position facing upward, the game ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, and in that state, the rotating body 1236 rotates to receive. When the part 1236a is rotated to the discharge position facing the right side, the game ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c to the V winning opening 1156, which is different from the bonus winning opening 1155 (big hit game). ) Is given, the player can be enjoyed by the given bonus, and the bonus is given when the game ball T is accepted into the V winning opening 1156 via the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Therefore, depending on whether or not the game ball T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the player can be excited and excited, and the game ball to the V winning hole 1156. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting T and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

This rotation of the rotating body 1236 moves the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 forward and backward, and the entire driving gear member 1233 is shrunk by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234, which is rotated around 1233a and meshes with the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extending portion 1233b of the drive gear member 1233, rotates in the opposite direction to the drive gear member 1233. When the driven gear member 1234 rotates, the rotating body 1236 rotates between the storage position and the discharge position. As a result, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 becomes faster than that in the case of rotating by a motor like a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can play the game ball T on the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Even if an attempt is made to set the timing at which the game ball T is driven so as to be accommodated, it is possible to make the timing difficult. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to store the game ball T in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, and thus it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to be received in the V winning opening 1156, and the bonus due to being received in the V winning opening 1156 is obtained. It is possible to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side by reducing the number of grants.

In addition, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (rotation body 1236) is larger than the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. Therefore, compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, since the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 becomes faster, even if the player tries to set the timing of driving the game ball T such that the game ball T is housed in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the timing is set. Can be difficult.

Furthermore, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b with a loss hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T flowing from the accessory winning hole 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the accommodation position. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the winning prize hole 1155. Therefore, even if the game ball T is intruded into the winning a prize hole 1155 by some illegal act, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not in the storage position, the game ball T is illegally stored in the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being fraudulently provided, and to reduce the burden on the gaming hall side due to the fraudulent activity. In particular, in the present embodiment, in a normal state in which the accessory winning hole 1155 is unacceptable, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is rotated toward the V winning opening 1156 side which coincides with the right opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is intruded into the winning a prize hole 1155, it is possible to recognize by a glance that the game ball T cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to prevent the act from being hesitated and the fraudulent act being performed.

Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than in the conventional case, even if the player tries to illegally receive the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 (the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236), the rotating body 1236 rotates faster. By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it is possible to make it apparent that it is difficult to make the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 receive the illegal game ball T, and the cheating is stopped and the cheating is stopped. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against the above can be provided. Further, since it is possible to prevent fraud, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, when the receiving portion 1236a opened to the outer peripheral side is rotated from the storage position to the release position, the game ball T stored in the receiving portion 1236a. Even if the centrifugal force due to the rotation acts on the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a is closed by the peripheral wall portion 1238a between the accommodation position and the discharging position, the game ball T is moved from the receiving portion 1236a by the centrifugal force. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from jumping out, and it is possible to reliably move the game ball T to the discharge position. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 1238a can prevent the game ball T from jumping out from the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 that is rotating, so that the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased and the rotation speed can be increased. The pachinko machine 1 that makes it difficult to set the timing of the body 1236 and reliably achieves the above-described operational effects can be provided.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 (the game ball T to the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153). (Depending on the result of the special lottery that is drawn by the acceptance of), the prize winning opening opening/closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 is movable, and the prize winning opening 1155 can receive the game ball T. In this state, when the game balls T are accepted into the winning a prize hole 1155, benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of the playing balls T are given, and thus the gaming ball T aiming at the winning a prize hole 1155 for the player. It is possible to entertain by performing the typing operation of. When the game ball T that has been hit in the game area 1100 aiming at the prize winning opening 1155 is accepted by the prize winning opening 1155, a privilege is given, and the player is further enjoyed by the granted privilege. You can The game ball T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is guided to the upper opening 1238b formed on the peripheral wall portion 1238a that covers the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper guiding portion 1238e of the V winning opening unit 1220B. , And contacts the rotating body 1236 via the upper opening 1238b. At this time, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b will be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates together with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, and when the receiving portion 1236a matches the right opening 1238c, From the receiving portion 1236a through the right opening 1238c to the right guiding portion 1238f, the right guiding portion 1238f guides the V winning opening 1156 to receive a bonus such as a jackpot game. It is possible to entertain the player further, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Since this rotating body 1236 is provided with only one receiving portion 1236a, compared to the case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in a conventional pachinko machine, there is a loss that is not guided to the V winning opening 1156. Since the receiving portion 1236a does not exist, the pachinko machine 1 is easy to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance even for a beginner or a player who is unfamiliar with the driving operation of the game ball T. The pachinko machine 1 can be made easier to select as the pachinko machine to play, and the game on the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the interest of the player is prevented from decreasing. can do.

Further, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, the rotating body 1236 of the rotating body 1236 can be compared with a case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in the related art. The outer diameter can be reduced, and it becomes possible to easily secure a space for arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be placed in an effective place by increasing the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating body 1236. Can be placed. At this time, since the rotator 1236 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the circular end surface of the rotator 1236 faces the front (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotator 1236 is changed. Even if the size is smaller than the conventional one, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 (the receiving portion 1236a) from being difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the entertaining of the game by the rotating body 1236 and reduce the interest.

Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 has a size such that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 is open and can receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e is provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b. With the hole 1230c communicating with the hole 1230a, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the upper opening 1238b, so that the game ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b is securely received by the receiving portion 1236a. Even if another game ball T is received from above the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a is in contact with another game ball T while being received by the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to suppress falling off from the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and it is possible to reliably send the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a to the V winning opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236.

In addition, since the rear side of the upper opening 1238b is provided with the upper guide portion 1238e and the hole 1230c communicating with the second discharge path 1230e, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 does not match the upper opening 1238b, Even if the game ball T flows down from the accessory winning hole 1155 side and comes into contact with the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236 via the upper opening 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharging path 1230e through the rear side hole 1230c. .. On the other hand, in the state where the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b and the game ball T has already been received by the receiving portion 1236a, another game ball T flows down from the role winning port 1155 side. , Even if the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a through the upper opening 1238b comes into contact with the game ball T from above, another game ball T coming from behind is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear side hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received in the prize winning opening 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the remaining game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls T from being received in the V winning opening 1156 in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since one of the plurality of game balls T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and is received in the V winning hole 1156, the privilege is given, and thus the rotating body 1236. Even if there is a game ball T which is not received by the receiving portion 1236a and is discharged from the loss hole 1230c, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost, and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. You can

In addition, since the game ball T that could not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged to the rear side of the rotating body 1236 from the loss hole 1230c, the game that cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Compared with the case where the ball T is discharged through at least one of the right and left sides of the rotating body 1236, the size of the V winning opening unit 1220B including the rotating body 1236 in front view can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100 is increased, so that the rotating body 1236 can be arranged in an effective place in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be easily seen from the player side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having amusement with the rotating body 1236 and deteriorating the interest of the player.

Furthermore, the center of the upper opening 1238b is formed so as to be slightly rearward of the center of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 that receives the game ball T, and the center of the game ball T that is received by the receiving portion 1236a. Since another gaming ball T coming from the rear comes into contact with the position slightly rearward, the upper mouth is passed through the upper guiding part 1238e while the gaming ball T is being received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When another game ball T from 1238b comes into contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a from above, guide the other game ball T that comes into contact with the game ball T from above to the rear with the hole 1230c. Therefore, another game ball T which came later can be surely discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

Further, since another game ball T coming from behind comes into contact with the position slightly rearward of the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game received by the receiving portion 1236a. A force that pushes the ball T on the side opposite to the loss hole 1230c acts on the ball T, and it is difficult for the ball T to drop toward the loss hole 1230c side and the state received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is dropped and there is no chance of being received by the V winning opening 1156. The game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a can be surely received by the V winning opening 1156, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and from having less interest.

Further, in the rotating body 1236, on the front surface side (inside) of the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, there is provided an inclined portion 1236b which is inclined obliquely toward the rear as it goes upward (away from the rotation center). Along with forming the center of the upper opening 1238b so as to be slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T, the game ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Therefore, when the game ball T flows down from the upper opening 1238b in a state where the game ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236 and the game ball T is caused by the inclined portion 1236b. Can be guided forward to be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T first comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b and abuts on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, so that the impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is relaxed. Since the rotating body 1236 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the flow speed of the game ball T can be attenuated and brought into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, the game can be performed at the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made difficult to bounce, and the game ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, the flow speed of the game ball T guided by the upper guiding portion 1238e can be attenuated. Therefore, even if another game ball T that has flowed through the upper guide portion 1238e comes into contact with the game ball T that has been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the flow speed will still flow through the upper guide portion 1238e. Since it is dampened, the impact due to the contact with the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 becomes small, and the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a jumps up from the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a to fall off from the receiving portion 1236a.

Furthermore, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape and the distribution speed of the gaming ball T can be attenuated by the upper guiding portion 1238e, the gaming ball T received in the accessory winning port 1155 is guided upwards. Even when flowing through the portion 1238e and contacting (contacting) the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) from the upper opening 1238b, the impact acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced, and the contact of the game ball T is made. It is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 from being easily damaged by the impact due to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being annoyed and deteriorating the interest in the game due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the rotating body 1236, and to suppress the decline in the interest of the player. You can

Further, in order to receive the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 via the rotating body 1236, it is necessary to open the accessory winning opening opening/closing member 1221 and put the accessory winning opening 1155 in a receivable state. It is possible to limit the opportunity of allowing the ball T to be accepted into the V winning opening 1156 (the accessory winning opening 1155), and it is possible to give a premium feeling to the V winning opening 1156 and the like. Therefore, if the winning a prize hole 1155 becomes acceptable according to the game state, there is an opportunity to make the V winning hole 1156 accept the game ball T, so that the winning prize hole 1155, the rotating body 1236, and the V winning hole 1156. It is possible to draw the player's attention to, etc., and it is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156, and at the same time, the player can hit the game ball T aiming at the accessory winning opening 1155. The operation can be positively performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and the interest in the game from decreasing.

[Re-explanation of the second starting port 1153 and the starting port door member 1214]
Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable starting opening unit 1210, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 arranged on the right end side by extending to the left and right with the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214. The possible heights of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c are made different, and the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 is located on the left side of the second starting opening 1153. A starting opening solenoid 1215 is attached to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward on the left and right sides of the second starting opening 1153 on the upper side and the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b. In accordance with a game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the starting opening solenoid 1215 (the lottery is performed when the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134). The forward/backward movement of the movable plunger 1215a (according to the result of the ordinary lottery) is transmitted to the starting opening door member 1214 slidably supported by the lower case 1211 so that the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward and backward. Therefore, the front and rear and top and bottom dimensions of the mechanism (variable starting port unit 1210) for sliding the starting port door member 1214 can be made smaller than the conventional one. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the installation space for providing the variable starter unit 1210 having the starter door member 1214 that slides back and forth according to the game state, and thus the starter door that slides back and forth in the game area 1100. The degree of freedom in arranging the member 1214 can be increased, and the atmosphere in the game area 1100 can be greatly changed by arranging the starting opening door member 1214 in a place that could not be arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player who strongly attracts the interest of the player and wants to be selected as a pachinko machine for playing can be provided.

Further, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable starting opening unit 1210 can be reduced, and even if the variable starting opening unit 1210 having the starting opening door member 1210 is provided, a decorative body, a movable decorative body, Also, since it is possible to equip the pachinko machine 1 with other members without causing pressure on other members such as accessory parts, it is possible to sufficiently exert the decorative effect and effect by the other members. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhance the appealing power to the player.

Further, the second starting port 1153 is arranged on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, and the first guide part 1214a, the second guide part 1214b, and the third guide part extending left and right of the starting port door member 1214. Since the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by 1214c, the first guiding of the starting opening door member 1214 is made when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state. When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T rolls to the right side on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c, and is received by the second starting port 1153. This means that the game ball T rolls toward the second starting opening 1153 on the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, and the third guiding portion 1214c, so that the player moves to the second starting opening 1153. It is possible to increase the expectation for acceptance of the game, and to prevent the player from entertaining and deteriorating the interest. At this time, when the starting opening door member 1214 that slides back and forth slides forward, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. Since the action of the starting opening door member 1214 is opposite to that of the variable receiving port (variable winning port) of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to a player or the like who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal can be obtained.

In addition, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the starting opening door member 1214 are slid forward and projected into the game area 1100 in accordance with the game state. When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end portion side, and therefore rolls over the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c extending to the left and right. The movement of the moving game ball T can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

Furthermore, when the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth according to the game state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a moves left and right as the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward. As it moves, it revolves around an axis that extends vertically around the body portion 1216a, and the body portion 1216a also extends vertically through the first piece 1216b that connects the engaging portion 1216c and the body portion 1216a. It will rotate around the axis. The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d, which extends from the body portion 1216a at a right angle to the first piece 1216b, is fitted and connected to the connecting pin 1214h protruding from the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, when the body portion 1216a rotates, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves around an axis extending vertically, and the connecting hole 1216e revolves to connect the connecting pin 1214h and the slider portion 1214g. As a result, the starting opening door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, it is possible to transmit the forward/backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 to surely slide the starting opening door member 1214 back and forth, and to certainly embody the pachinko machine 1 capable of exhibiting the above-described effects. be able to.

The second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 extends to the slider portion 1214g below the starting opening solenoid 1215 in the starting opening door member 1214. Since the length is shorter than in the conventional case, the starting opening door member is relatively small. The front and rear slide range of 1214 can be narrowed, and the front and rear dimensions can be made smaller than before. Further, since the link member 1216 is rotated around the vertically extending axis, the vertical dimension is smaller than that in the conventional case where the link member 1216 is rotated around the horizontally extending axis. can do. Therefore, the mechanism (variable starting port unit 1210) for sliding the starting port door member 1214 back and forth can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. it can.

Further, since the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower side of the lower case 1211 via the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Compared with the case of inducing and releasing to the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, a passage member or the like for receiving the game ball T received in the second starting opening 1153 is provided on the rear side. There is no need, and it is possible to easily secure a space on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and accessory on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable starting opening unit 1210. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game area 1100, even when the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is retracted rearward and is in an unacceptable position, the second starting opening 1153 is placed in the playing area 1100. Since the second starting opening 1153 is not always closed while being kept open, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153, and the game is played. The user's interest can be strongly attracted to the second starting port 1153. Therefore, since the second starting port 1153 is always open, it is possible to direct the player to the second starting port 1153 regardless of the movement (sliding) of the starting port door member 1214. With respect to the second starting opening 1153, the player can have an expectation for receiving the game ball T so that the player does not get tired of it, and the second starting opening 1153 is provided to the player regardless of the position of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and reduce the interest in the game by driving the game ball T into the target.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the starting opening door member 1214 is located at any of the reception-possible position that projects forward and the unacceptable position that retracts rearward, When viewed from the front, it looks the same, which makes it difficult for the player to know the position of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, since the position of the starting opening door member 1214 is difficult to understand, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the starting opening door member 1214 is in the receivable position in which the starting opening door member 1214 projects forward, and the player aims at the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to entertain the game ball T by driving it.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the excessive acceptance of the game ball T, the special lottery result in which the advantageous game state is generated by the game ball T excessively accepted by the second starting opening 1153 is drawn. It is possible to prevent the game from being played, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down above the second starting port 1153, the second starting port 1153 flows frontward. Since it is arranged below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j of the path forming member 1161, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j prevents the game ball T from being directly received by the second starting opening 1153. , Will be discharged downward from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right in accordance with the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 100 (in response to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134). The game ball T discharged downward from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j in a state of sliding forward in the game area 1100 and projecting in the starting opening door member 1214 is the second starting opening. When flowing down to the left outer side portion of the upper shelf portion 1161j, the game ball T rolls on the starting opening door member 1214 in the direction of the second starting opening 1153 and is received by the second starting opening 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, benefits such as payout of the game ball T and lottery of the special lottery result are provided, so that the player can be enjoyed by the provided benefit. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153.

The starting opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right is adapted to slide in the front-rear direction different from the receivable direction facing the left direction of the game ball T in the second starting opening 1153, and the starting opening in the game area 1100. When the game ball T flows down on the starting opening door member 1214 when the door member 1214 is slid from the protruding state to the non-projecting state (immersed state), the gaming ball T is flat on the starting opening door member 1214. It takes some time to reach the second starting port 1153 from the left outer side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, so that the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. If the starting opening door member 1214 retracts and sinks in between, the game ball T will fall from the starting opening door member 1214 without being accepted by the second starting opening 1153. More specifically, while the game ball T is rolling to the right toward the second starting port 1153, the starting port door member 1214 is retracted so that the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 on which the game ball T is mounted. The game ball T gradually becomes smaller and falls off from the starting opening door member 1214 before reaching the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the game ball T is excessively received by the second starting opening 1153, so that the privilege is unnecessary (especially, by receiving the game ball T to the extra second starting opening 1153). It is possible to reduce the number of special lottery results in which an advantageous gaming state occurs, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

When the starting sphere door member 1214 slides forward so as to project into the game area 1100, if the game ball T flows down onto the starting mouth door member 1214, the starting sphere door member 1214 causes the game sphere T to move. It may be guided to and accepted by the second starting port 1153. However, since the starting opening door member 1214 slides according to the game state, it is difficult to know the timing when the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100, and the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the playing area 1100. After confirming that the starting mouth door member 1214 is projected, the player performs a driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting mouth door member 1214, so that the starting mouth door member 1214 is slid so as to project into the game area 1100. It is less likely that the game ball T will flow down onto the starting opening door member 1214, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214, the contact of the gaming ball T acts on the starting opening door member 1214. The impact only acts on the slide groove 1211d in the lower case 1211 of the variable starting port unit 1210 that slidably supports the starting port door member 1214, and the drive mechanism (starting port solenoid 1215) that slides the starting port door member 1214. And the link member 1216) hardly act, and the starting opening door member 1214 (variable starting opening unit 1210) can be made less likely to be damaged.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) of sliding the starting opening door member 1214 is shorter than that in the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time from when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 until it is retracted and retracted, so that the starting opening door member 1214 guides the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153. The starting opening door member 1214 can be immersed before it is performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the second starting opening 1153 to receive the game ball T. Further, since the starting opening door member 214 is slid in the front-back direction, a space for immersing the starting opening door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 are arranged on the rear side of the game area 1100. A mechanism for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 (starting opening solenoid 1215, link member 1216, etc.) does not press the inside of the game area 1100, and makes the inside of the game area 1100 as wide as possible. You can

Moreover, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second starting opening 1153 in the starting opening door member 1214 is formed to be flat without a protrusion, the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100. Even when the game ball T flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214 when it is slid back from the state where it is retracted and retracted, the projection is attracting the gaming ball T to the rear end side of the game area 1100 and the starting opening door. It is difficult for the game ball T to fall from the member 1214 and the game ball T does not bounce toward the second starting port 1153 due to the protrusion, and the game ball T can be smoothly dropped from the starting port door member 1214. It is possible to reliably achieve the effect described above.

Further, the game ball T can be received from the left side to the second starting port 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the starting port door member 1214 extending left and right enters the second starting port 1153 as it is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the game ball T is guided to the starting opening door member 1214 and is surely received in the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 according to the game state, it can be assumed that the game ball T will flow down to the starting opening door member 1214 and be surely accepted by the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, it is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214, and it is possible to prevent the player from delighting and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the plunger 1215a movable by the energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth by projecting or retracting into the game area 1100, and thus the starting opening door member 1214. The sliding speed of the starting opening door member 1214 can be increased with a simple structure as compared with the case where the motor is slid by a motor. Therefore, since the starting opening door member 1214 can be quickly slid, the starting opening door member 1214 is moved to the game area 1100 before the game ball T on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153. It is possible to retract from the inside, it is possible to reliably reduce the extra game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes when the game ball T is hit in the game area 110 by the operation of the player, and thus the lottery is performed. When the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the normal lottery result, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is the first of the front flow path forming members 1161. (2) When it flows down to the starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls leftward by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and when it is discharged from the left end side, it flows down downward by the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. , Abuts on the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 located below the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and moves leftward along the starting opening door member 1214. By being guided to the right on the opposite side, the fluid flows in a U-turn shape and is received by the second starting port 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, the game ball T is paid out and the special lottery result is drawn as a privilege. Therefore, the privilege can entertain the player and the game ball can be enjoyed. As T is received in the second starting opening 1153, the driving operation (right hitting) of the game ball T aiming at the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j can be enjoyed. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 was bent obliquely to the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, at first glance at the player, when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 side. It can be recognized, and the expectation for accepting the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 can be increased. Further, in the starting opening door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second starting opening 1153 and the second guiding portion 1214b near the second starting opening 1153 have different inclination angles, and the first guiding portion is different. Since the acceleration of the game ball T is fast in 1214a and the acceleration of the game ball T is slow in the second guide portion 1214b, the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the part where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the rolling speed of the game ball T, which does not change on the starting opening door member, changes, so that the player can be surprised and given a strong impact, and the player is less tired. In addition, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T changes and differs between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the starting opening door member 1214, rolling on the starting opening door member 1214. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the playing game ball T so that the player can pay attention to the playing ball T, and the playing ball T rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 can be paid attention to. With this, it is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 to which the game ball T is guided.

Further, the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the game ball T comes into contact with the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 from above, it is likened to. Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, since it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, it becomes possible to distribute the game ball T along the left and right starting opening door member 1214. The game ball T can be caused to make an intended movement on the starting opening door member 1214, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Moreover, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T hits the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 from above. In the case of contact, it is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the game ball T that is in contact with the first guide portion 1214a is reflected to the right side where the second starting port 1153 is present, so that the player is in the game state. Accordingly, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the game ball T can be received by the second starting opening 1153 by letting the game ball T flow down to the first guide portion 1214a. Can be made Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the player positively performs the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the player's interest.

Further, since the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed within the range of 0.2 times to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a allows the game ball T to be played. Can be reliably guided to the side of the second starting port 1153, and the rolling speed of the guided game ball T can be suppressed from becoming unnecessarily high to make it easier to see the rolling game ball T. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the movement of the game medium and deteriorating the interest.

Further, since the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 in plan view are formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 is formed. The game ball T rolling on the starting port door member 1214 toward the second starting port 1153 side can be appropriately displayed to the player without excess or deficiency, and the movement of the game ball T having an impact can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the movement of the game ball T and deteriorating the interest of the player.

Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state and the game ball T is guided by the front flow path forming member 1161 provided in the playing area 1100, the starting opening door is opened. Since the game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second starting port 1153, that is, the first guiding part 1214a side, the game ball T is guided to the first guiding part 1214a of the starting port door member 1214. Can be made to flow down (contact). Therefore, since the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right sides of the starting opening door member 1214, the movement of the gaming ball T by the starting opening door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a is given to the player. It is possible to surely show the game, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

Further, since the second starting mouth upper shelf 1161j is arranged immediately above the starting mouth door member 1214 so that the game ball T flows in a U-turn shape, the second starting mouth upper shelf 1161j is moved to the starting mouth door member 1214. In comparison with the case where the game ball T is arranged in a position on the left outer side of the first guide portion 1214a with respect to immediately above the game ball T to flow in a crank shape, the starting opening door member 1214 and the first opening door member 1214 in the game area 1100 are provided. (2) It is possible to reduce the space in the left-right direction occupied by the upper shelves 1161j of the starting opening and the like. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be increased, so that the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be arranged in the game area 1100 at a location that is easily seen by the player, and the above-described operational effects can be obtained. It is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 to play.

Also, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening area standing wall portion 1161m extends vertically to the left outside of the first guide portion 1214a. By the time the game ball T discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214, it is brought into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m and left of the first guiding portion 1214a. It can be prevented from flowing down to the outside, and the game ball T can be reliably flowed down onto the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second When the game ball T flowing down between the starting opening area left standing wall portions 1161m abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a) and bounces, the game ball T is moved by the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m. It is possible to reliably prevent the second starting port 1153 from flowing to the opposite side, and the starting port door member 1214 can reliably guide the game ball T to the second starting port 1153.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down to the upper side of the second starting port 1153 which is open toward the front, the second Immediately above the starting port 1153, the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j abuts, and the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j rolls in a direction away from the position immediately above the second starting port 1153 to the left according to the inclination of the upper surface, In the starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, it is discharged from the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 and comes into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m. At this time, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and a "normal hit" is selected as a result of the normal lottery, whereby the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100. Then, the game ball T discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and abutting on the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 and is moved by the starting opening door member 1214. It is guided to the front side of the second starting port 1153 and received by the second starting port 1153. At this time, a vertically extending second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161k is provided on the right outer side of the second starting opening 1153 on the same side where the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is higher. , The game ball T guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214 tries to pass through the front side of the second starting port 1153, but abuts on the right standing wall portion 1161k of the second starting port region and passes by. The game ball T guided by the starting opening door member 1214 is received in the second starting opening 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, a benefit such as payout of the game ball T and a lottery of the special lottery result is given, and the player can be enjoyed by the given benefit. , So that the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153, the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting port 1153 can be enjoyed. Then, before the game ball T is received by the second starting port 1153, the game ball T abuts on the second starting port upper shelf 1161j, the second starting port region left standing wall 1161m, and the starting port door member 1214. This makes it possible to make a U-turn, and to entertain the player by the movement of the game ball T whose distribution direction changes abruptly, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 and the gaming ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, as described above, the gaming ball T makes a U-turn. Therefore, the circulation speed of the game ball T is changed by 180 degrees, so that the circulation speed of the game ball T becomes relatively slow. Therefore, the movement of the game ball T circulating in a U-turn can be easily seen, so that the player can easily entertain the movement of the game ball T, and entertaining the movement of the game ball T lowers the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T flows in a U-turn shape, and in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 does not project into the playing area 1100, the game ball T Therefore, even if the game ball T is made to flow down to the same second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j according to the protrusion of the starting opening door member 1214, the movement of the gaming ball T is changed. be able to. Therefore, since the movement (flow) of the game ball T changes according to the game state (passage of the gate member 1134 by the game ball T), the game ball T with various movements is shown to the player. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and deteriorating the interest of the player.

Furthermore, between the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214, which are arranged vertically, only one game ball T is allowed to flow, and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening. Since the vertical distance between the door member 1214 and the door member 1214 is as narrow as possible, the game ball T flowing from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j to the second starting opening left standing wall portion 1161m and flowing over the starting opening door member 1214. Since the movement of the player can be made to make a sudden U-turn, the player can entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T, which has not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game is increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 extends to the left and right longer than the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening Since it is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161j, the starting opening door member 1214 becomes conspicuous, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the protruding starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, by making the player pay attention to the starting opening door member 1214 when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m near the starting opening door member 1214. Since it is possible to draw attention together, the game ball T rolling on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 can be surely visually recognized, and moves like a U-turn. Driving the game ball T aiming at the second starting mouth upper shelf 1161j so that the movement of the game ball T can be enjoyed and the game ball T flows on the starting door member 1214 to the player. It is possible to perform the operation, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected, if the game ball T is circulated on the starting opening door member 1214 via the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m, the second Since it is guided to the starting opening 1153 and accepted by the second starting opening 1153, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects according to the game state, the player can enter the starting opening door member 1214 into the game ball T14. It is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j for sending, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the player.

Further, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 aiming at the second starting port 1153 flows down onto the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, it will roll to the left away from the second starting port 1153. By moving the game ball T away from the second starting opening 1153, it is possible to make the player feel disappointed. Then, when the game ball T is discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, if the starting opening door member 1214 projects, the game ball T separated from the second starting opening 1153 is moved by the starting opening door member 1214. Rolls to the right toward the second starting port 1153. In other words, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and returns to the second starting port 1153 side, the player can be pleased and the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161k vertically extending to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is provided on the outer right side of the second starting opening 1153, the second starting opening upper shelf portion extending left and right. Even if an attempt is made to receive the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of 1161j is high to the second starting port 1153 disposed below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, from the right outer side of the second starting port 1153. The second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being received in the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, in order to receive the game ball T in the second starting port 1153, it is necessary to let the game ball T flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is low, and therefore the second starting port 1153. It is possible to encourage the player to drive the game ball T into the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j so that the game ball T flows down to the side. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the game ball T is formed by the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, and the starting opening door member 1214. Since it makes a U-turn and is guided in the direction of the second starting port 1153, it is possible to entertain the movement of the gaming ball T circulating around and to expect the acceptance of the gaming ball T into the second starting port 1153. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more entertaining and prevent the player from having a lesser interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T is hit in the game area 1100 by the operation of the player, the game state is changed by the hit game ball T, and the changed game state is obtained. Accordingly, a starting opening door member 1214 extending in the left-right direction longer than the outer diameter of the gaming ball T and guiding the gaming ball T to the second starting opening 1153 slides forward and projects into the game area 1100. In this game area 1100, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protruding forward is arranged on the right side of the second starting opening 1153, and the second starting opening right is on the upper side of the second starting opening 1153. A second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is arranged so that the left side becomes lower from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k, and the starting opening door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When protruding inward, the left end portion of the starting opening door member 1214 extends outward from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. Then, when the game ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls toward the left end side on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and flows down from the left end. .. At this time, if the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T will be received on the starting opening door member 1214 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 is protruding into the game area 1100, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 are on the upper side and outside the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T is allowed to flow down, the game ball T is received on the starting opening door member 1214. Then, the game ball T received on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, and the third guiding portion 1214c, and then the second. When accepted into the starting opening 1153, the payout of the game ball T, the lottery of the special lottery result, and the like are performed as a privilege, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, since the starting opening door member 1214 extends long in the left-right direction (about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T) so as to receive the plurality of game balls T in the left-right direction, It is possible to make the player illusion that many game balls T are to be received in the second starting opening 1153. More specifically, when a player becomes accustomed to playing on a conventional pachinko machine equipped with an opening/closing member extending to the left and right, the player becomes more interested in the size of the opening/closing member extending to the left and right, and corresponds to the opening/closing member. There is relatively little concern about the size of the receiving entrance (eg, the big winning opening). That is, it is assumed that the longer the opening/closing member is in the left and right, the more game balls T can be received. Therefore, it is recognized that the starting opening door member 1214 projecting into the game area 1100 and extending to the left and right according to the game state is an opening/closing member in the conventional pachinko machine, and the starting opening door member 1214 extends to the left and right long. Therefore, it is an illusion that many game balls T can be accepted. Then, the player can positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 by the illusion of the player, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the interest of the player. it can. On the other hand, since the second starting port 1153 to which the game ball T is guided by the starting port door member 1214 is formed to have a size in which only one game ball T is actually accepted, the second starting port 1153 is provided on the starting port door member 1214. Even if a plurality of game balls T flow down, they are not accepted at one time and can be accepted only one by one. Therefore, the number of game balls T accepted per hour can be reduced as compared with the conventional case, and the privilege to be granted is Since the number is relatively small, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153 even if the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is aimed in addition to the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged on the upper side of the starting opening door member 1214 (second starting opening 1153), substantially the entire length of the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is obtained. It can be the same as receiving the game ball T over a long period, and it is possible to entertain the player by mounting many game balls T. At this time, since the lower left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is received on the starting opening door member 1214, a plurality of game balls T are simultaneously present on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. Even if it is done, it will be handed over to the starting opening door member 1214 one by one and guided to the second starting opening 1153, and it is possible to avoid that many game balls T are received in the second starting opening 1153 at one time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, on the upper side and the right side of the second starting opening 1153, since the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protruding into the game area 1100 are provided, the starting opening door member 1214 plays the game. If the ball T is not guided to the second starting port 1153, it is difficult to make the second starting port 1153 accept the game ball T. Therefore, since the game ball T cannot be received in the second starting opening 1153 unless the starting opening door member 1214 projects, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by the projection of the starting opening door member 1214. By projecting the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, since the standing wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end portion of the third guide portion 1214c of the starting opening door member 1214 is provided, the first guiding portion inclined so that the right side of the starting opening door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided toward the front side of the second starting opening 1153 by the 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b comes into contact with the standing wall portion 1214e, and thus passes the front side of the second starting opening 1153 and is further rightward. It can be prevented from moving to the side. At this time, even if the analogy game ball T gets over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 projects into the game area 1100. The right standing wall portion 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Therefore, the game ball T received by the starting opening door member 1214 can be reliably guided to and accepted by the second starting opening 1153.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to be projected into the game area 1100, a lot of games are compared with the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is rotated and projected. It is possible to reduce the likelihood that the starting opening door member 1214 is easily damaged by the impact caused by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the starting door member is rotatably supported around an axis extending left and right and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the starting door member is in a protruding state. It becomes difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation from longer than the length from the lower side to the upper side of the starting opening door member, and it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving many game balls T. There is a risk that you will not be able to. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side of the starting opening door member 1214 can be made longer than the portion protruding into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving many game balls T.

Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward and is projected into the game area 1100, the starting opening door member 1214 slides backward when the game ball T is present on the starting opening door member 1214. Then, depending on the position of the game ball T on the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball T falls off from the starting opening door member 1214 before being guided to the second starting opening 1153, and the second starting opening 1153. It can be prevented from being accepted, and it is possible to suppress the additional acceptance of the game ball T and suppress an increase in the load on the game hall side.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation is a plurality of obstacle nails G, windmills, and center accessory objects arranged in the game area 1100. By abutting on the 1130, the winning opening unit 1150, etc., it will be distributed while moving in various directions, and the game ball T can entertain the player by making various movements. In this normal state, it is difficult for the game ball T to circulate immediately below the obstacle nail G or the like with which the game ball T abuts, so that the game ball T is easily distributed in the game region 1100. (First region) and a region that is difficult to distribute are formed. Therefore, the game ball T is not received in the second starting port 1153 arranged below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j arranged downstream according to the detection of the passing game ball T. The starting opening door member 1214 of the second starting opening upper shelf which appears forward in the area (first area) in which the game ball T easily flows in the game area 1100 and is outside the area in which the game ball T easily flows. A region (second region) in which the game ball T easily flows is formed in a region in which the game ball T on the lower side of the portion 1161j hardly flows. Therefore, the distribution path of the game ball T changes due to the appearance and disappearance of the start door member 1214, and the game ball T can be distributed in an area where the game ball T is difficult to distribute in the normal state, so that the game ball T is normally distributed. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T that circulates in the unseen region (second region), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and deteriorating the interest of the player.

Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 appears forward and appears, when the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 is guided by the starting opening door member 1214, it is received by the second starting opening 1153 with an extremely high probability. , When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, the payout of the game ball T as a privilege and a lottery of a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs are performed. It is possible to make the player actively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214, and it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the driving operation of the game ball T and deteriorating the interest. can do.

Further, the second starting port 1153 for paying out the game balls T, the lottery of the special lottery results, and the like is arranged in a region (second region) where the game balls T are difficult to flow in a normal state of the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball T aiming at the second starting opening 1153, the game ball T is not accepted. Then, when the starting ball door member 1214 moves forward in response to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 and the game ball T can be distributed to a region (second region) where the game ball T is hard to flow, the second starting port. The game ball T can be accepted in 1153. Therefore, even if the second starting opening 1153 is opened in the game area 1100, the game ball T cannot be received in the normal state, and the starting opening door member 1214 can be received unless it appears (advance). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of premium by advancing the starting opening door member 1214, and it seems that there is something good for the player by advancing the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing.

Further, in order to advance (appear) the starting opening door member 1214 to form a region (second region) in which the game ball T easily flows, it is necessary to pass the game ball T to the gate member 1134. , It is possible to allow the player to perform the driving operation (right-handedness) of the game ball T aiming at the gate member 1134, so that the player can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the starting opening door member 1214 moves in the front-back direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, it is not necessary to secure a space for immersing the starting opening door member 1214 in the game area 1100. The area in which the game ball T circulates in the game area 1100 can be made as wide as possible, and the movement of the game sphere T becomes large by distributing the game sphere T in a wide range, so that the player can play the game ball T It is possible to entertain the movement of and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, since the flat plate-shaped starting door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the front-rear direction, when viewed from the player side, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the starting opening door member 1214 is advancing forward and appears, or is retracting and being immersed. Therefore, the protruding/withdrawing state of the starting opening door member 1214 can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 flows through the position of the starting opening door member 1214 and contacts the starting opening door member 1214. As a result, the movement of the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 for recognizing the appearance/disappearance state can be noticed, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, when the game ball T flows down the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 is advanced and appears, the first guide portion 1214a of the flat starting opening door member 1214. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and is guided to the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, it is difficult for the game ball T to flow in the normal state where the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted. The game ball T can be surely circulated on the lower side of the 1161j, and the above-described effects can be surely achieved.

Moreover, the starting opening door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, and the starting opening door member 1214 is on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 during distribution (rolling). When the 1214 moves backward, or while the starting opening door member 1214 is moving backward, the second starting opening changes while the direction in which the starting opening door member 1214 contacts the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j changes. When the game ball T flows down on the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start port 1153 because the starting door member 1214 extends long right and left. Before the game ball T reaches the right end portion (third guide portion 1214c) of the starting opening door member 1214, the backward movement of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed by driving the starting opening solenoid 1215 in an extremely short time. The game ball T will fall from the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 starts to retract, it is possible to prevent the guidance of the game ball T from being sufficiently performed, so that the extra game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153. It is possible to suppress, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Further, by dropping the game ball T from the middle of the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to make the player feel unfortunate and increase the expectation for the next opportunity, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. can do.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Gaming board 1100 Gaming area 1112 Gaming panel 1120 Table unit 1134 Gate member 1150 Victory port unit 1151 General winning port 1152 First starting port 1153 Second starting port 1154 Large winning port 1155 Role winning port (variable receiving port)
1156 V prize hole (special entrance)
1220 character unit 1220A character winning hole unit 1220B V winning hole unit 1221 character winning hole opening/closing member 1230 unit front base 1230c lose hole (discharge hole)
1232 V prize solenoid 1232a Plunger 1233 Drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a Shaft 1233b Extension piece 1233c Drive gear 1233d Engagement portion 1234 Driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a driven gear 1236 rotating body 1236a receiving portion 1238 ball guiding member 1238a peripheral wall portion 1238b upper opening (accommodation opening)
1238c Right port (outlet port)
1238d ball entrance 1238e upper guiding part 1238f right guiding part T game ball

Claims (1)

Launching means for sequentially launching game media to the game area,
A profit giving means for giving a profit,
An opening/closing member operable between a closed state and an open state is provided, and when the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game medium in a specific rolling area of the game area is entered into the internal area. And a means of winning
A specific area that can be given a special benefit by passing a game ball that has entered the internal area,
When a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the opening and closing control means for controlling the operation by the opening and closing member,
The winning means is
When the game medium is continuously emitted by the projecting means when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game medium is in a state of waiting for entry into the internal area of the winning opening means within the specific rolling area. A medium decelerating unit that makes it possible to decelerate the flow-down speed, and, when the opening/closing member is in the open state, a maintenance medium entry allowance that allows the decelerated game medium to enter the internal area of the winning opening unit. Have means,
The opening and closing control means,
After maintaining the opening/closing member in a closed state for a special closing interval that is longer than the interval at which the game medium is launched by the launching means, the special closing is made even though the opening time is shorter than the special closing interval. A short opening long closing game realizing means capable of executing a control for causing a short opening operation in which the game medium in the entry waiting state is allowed to enter the internal area of the winning opening means during an interval. Cage,
The short open long closed game realizing means,
While the profit is being given by the profit giving means, the short opening operation is set to be equal to or longer than the interval of the game medium being shot by the launching means so that the game medium in the entry waiting state is allowed to enter the internal area of the winning opening means. By executing a plurality of times across the special closing interval, the total time during which the opening/closing member is opened in the plurality of short opening operations is larger than that in the case where the opening/closing member is always opened. Enter the medium into the internal area of the winning opening means,
The total time during which the opening/closing member is in the open state in the plurality of short opening operations is longer than the period during which the effect is executable when the opening/closing member is normally opened over the special closing interval. The production is performed while a long closing period in which the opening/closing member is closed and a short opening period in which the opening/closing member is opened for a short opening time shorter than the special closing interval appear repeatedly. A gaming machine characterized by.